Home

E7N Drive/Bypass Technical Manual

1. 3 1 Digital Operator and Control Panel Display 2 Drive Mati ab 11 Example of Changing a Parameter 22 Chapter 4 Start Up and Operation 4 1 Start UP 2 bypass UD Prebaratlokk a 4 Bypass Unit Start UP ProceduUte 5 Bypass Unit Operation Description 10 Chapter 5 Programmilg ca eue eee 5 1 Regarding uestem aam 2 Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters 4 Bing RII T T TES 10 Table of Contents vii Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting esee 6 1 Bypass and H O A Control Panel Diagnostics 2 eet 6 Drive TFOUDISSNOOUING 19 Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure 25 Drive Date Stamp Information 9999 29 Chapter 7
2. Fig 7 5 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure Maintenance 7 5 Notes Maintenance 7 6 Appendix Parameters This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names along with a description of each Also below the parameter name in bold type is the abbreviated name as it appears on the digital operator display keypad F arameter EISE 2 iure rise MIENNE ___ _ 26 pc TIRES 28 Fault 5 LIST aoro E tp iot eni atl ec M D du 29 Decimal to Hex 1 eene 30 NOTE 1 Factory settings listed in this appendix are for the Drive only See Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 for E7N Bypass factory settings NOTE 2 In this parameter list the second column Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display contains information that appears on the optional LCD display The standard LED display does not show this level of detail For the LED display only the data entered or the number of the selection will be shown The optional LCD keypad is required to see the complete description Parameters A 1 Parameter List Parameter No Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display 1 00 1 01 1 03 1 04 1 05 2 01 2 02 2 03 2 04 2 05 2 06 Language Selection Select Language Access Level Selection Access Level Initial
3. 2 Programming Instructions for Individual Drive Parameters 2 Programming for Various Configuration and Options 2 Jose deu pats 2 Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters 4 Discussion of Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter iie op Lie oe caet 7 Drive Parameter 10 AT InitialiZatlQD ooi e o 10 12 02 DG Braking 17 19 23 DS Energy Savings sisse tiec desque Ra xw cs as uS 37 38 d1 Preset References 39 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits 41 Jump Frequencies 42 d4 Seduenmce 43 ET MIT PAUSE 44 EZ Na 47 FO Com T eran 48 mul Bre Nae gen 49 12
4. Fig 5 32 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Deceleration B 3 05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running Seng 9 Died Decel Time 1 factory default Time 2 E 3 06 Stall Prevention Level During Running Setting Range 30 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current The Stall Prevention During Running function will attempt to avoid a Drive OC fault occurrence while the Drive is operating at a constant speed If L3 05 0 Disabled the Drive may fault if the load increases sufficiently to cause the output current to reach the OC fault level 180 of Drive rated output current If L3 05 1 Decel Time 1 the Drive is outputting a constant speed and the Drive s output current level exceeds the level set by parameter L3 06 for more than 100 ms the Drive will begin to decelerate at the rate specified by parameter C1 02 The Drive will continue to decelerate until the output current level drops below the L3 06 level less a 2 hysteresis Once the output current drops below the L3 06 2 level the Drive will begin to accelerate at the currently active acceleration rate either C1 01 or C1 03 If L3 05 2 Decel Time 2 the Drive will function as described above except C1 04 will be used instead of C1 02 as the deceleration rate used when the output current exceeds L3 06 for more than 100 ms The following figure demonstrates accele
5. Output Frequency Bias 0 OV 5V 10V 4mA 12mA 20mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 25 Output Frequency as Commanded via Analog Input with Increased Gain Setting Adjustment of the bias setting will likewise adjust the speed command that is equivalent to the minimum analog input level 0Vdc If for instance the bias is set to 25 then 0Vdc or 4mA will be equivalent to 25 speed command Since the minimum speed command is 0 an analog input of 2 5 tolO0Vdc 8 to 20mA will now be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Gain 100 Output Frequency Bias 25 8mA Analog Input Signal Fig 5 26 Output Frequency with Reduced Bias Setting As a further example for an inverse acting speed command set the bias 100 and the gain 0 The minimum analog input level OVdc or 4mA will produce a 100 speed command and the maximum analog input level 10Vdc or 20mA will produce a 0 speed command Bias 100 Output Frequency Gain 0 OV 10V 4mA 20 Analog Input Signal Fig 5 27 Output Frequency with Inverted Gain and Bias Settings Programming 5 55 B H3 08 Drive Terminal 2 Signal Level Sens o oo 4 20 H3 08 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 The H3 08 parameter Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level allows the programmer to specify the signal that will be applied
6. 19 Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter 19 Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations 19 Physical Installation 1 1 Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style The Bypass covers two voltage ranges 208 VAC and 480 VAC Ratings applicable are from 1 2 to 50 HP Table 1 1 Bypass NEL m Bypass NEL m Model Number Continuous Uses Voltage Output Basic Drive NEMA 1 Current Model Number Amps E7NVD002 CIMR E7U22P2 E7NVD003 CIMR E7U22P2 E7NVD004 CIMR E7U22P2 208 VAC E7NVD007 CIMR E7U22P2 E7NVD010 CIMR E7U22P2 E7NVD016 CIMR E7U23P7 E7NVD024 CIMR E7U27P5 E7NVD030 CIMR E7U27P5 E7NVD046 CIMR E7U2011 E7NVD059 CIMR E7U2015 E7NVD074 CIMR E7U2018 001 CIMR E7U42P2 001 CIMR E7U42P2 E7NVB002 CIMR E7U42P2 E7NVB003 CIMR E7U42P2 004 CIMR E7U42P2 E7NVB007 7043 7 mom 011 CIMR E7U45P5 014 CIMR E7U47P5 021 CIMR E7U49P0 E7NVB027 CIMR E7U4011 E7NVB034 CIMR E7U4015 040 CIMR E7U4018 E7NVB052 CIMR E7U4024 065 CIMR E7U4030 Physical Installation 1 2 Enclosure Data Table 1 2 208V Enclosure Data 4 5 Input HP NEC m Enclosure Dimensions Weight Electrical Volts FLA 110 1 of Schematic 1 min W D Assembly inches E7U22P21 4 6 EN 1 1 52 38 15 43 14 25 150 Ibs Note 2 Th
7. OQ NE a EPI USUS 7 1 2 Removing and Replacing the Drive a Bypass 7 A 1 NIME NEUTER 2 EE 26 Fault ace p 20 OUI 29 Decimal to 5 DNE 30 Appendix B Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Diye Er 2 Appendix C Specifications uo C 1 Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications 2 Appendix D Communication 42 D 1 Serial COMMUNICATION exec seven eeu yx eua Cet EH e a o Ee C P x e e d E Dd 2 Using Modbus Communication 3 Wetlasys 16 APOGEE FLN POM i M EIE E RO RETE 20 Appendix E Periphe
8. Bus Reactor 1 B 3 Contactor Bypass Z 5 Bus Reactor 1 Fig 1 3 Bypass Unit Model Number 1 3 and 5 DC Bus Chokes only available as an option base numbers up to 074 and NOTE 040 Larger drives have DC Bus Choke as standard efesotomasyon com Physical Installation 1 6 Bypass Product Options Option 3 Contactor bypass Isolates the drive circuit by adding a separate drive input contactor 100 kA short circuit current rating is provided when using this option in conjunction with option D below Option Motor Circuit Protector MCP Disconnect Replaces the standard input disconnect switch and provides short circuit protection integral with the Drive and Bypass package The MCP includes a through the door padlockable operator mechanism Without this option short circuit protection must be provided by others on the input side of the Drive and Bypass unit Option D Fused input disconnect replaces the standard input disconnect switch and provides 100kA of short circuit protection for the drive and bypass package Option Drive Input Disconnect Switch Provides disconnect means for the input side of the Drive for Drive isolation capability during Bypass operation This disconnect is located inside the enclosure with an integral operating handle Option J Enable Embedded Serial Communications A no cost option The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of net
9. eee sa Connector For cable to Drive Control Fuse Option Port 6221 Connector rea Option Port Connector Mounting Holes 5 Places Fig 6 1 Electronic Bypass Control Board Layout Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 5 Drive Diagnostics Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives 1s available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Technical Assistance Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website www yaskawa com When calling for technical support please have the following materials available e The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this e Complete nameplate information from the Drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps e A list with your parameter settings e sketch of the electrical power train from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Par
10. Fig 2 2 Ground Wiring Examples For grounding connection to earth ground see Figure 2 1 B Control Circuit Ground Terminals The control logic PCB A2 provides a ground terminal marked PE to accept the control wire shield connection Terminal PE is located at the top left of PCB A2 near TB4 The control wire shield should be connected on this end only the opposite end should be isolated with electrical tape IMPORTANT Grounding of the Bypass enclosure and motor is required for proper system operation Electrical Installation 2 5 Wire Routing The following Figures indicate suggested wire entry and bending areas for representative wall mount enclosures Fig 2 3 Typical Wall Mount Enclosure efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 6 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 VAC Table 2 2 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 VAC CIMR _ 20P4 to 2018 1 2 Hp to 25 Hp Note 1 Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the wiring Drive and or personal injury 2 Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives 3 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC Table 2 3 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC CIMR __ _
11. ULaRm Am _ 3 ULARm H 6 02 Torque Detection Level 1 Setting Range 0 to 300 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 15 of Drive rated output current E 6 03 Torque Detection Time 1 Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds The Drive can be programmed to indicate when either an overtorque or an undertorque conditions exist A digital output must be programmed for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 Trq Det 1 N O or 17 Trq Det 1 N C A warning of an overtorque condition can indicate a jam and an undertorque condition can indicate a broken belt no water in a pump or other loss of load To configure Torque Detection requires the following decisions 1 Do you wish to check for an overtorque condition or an undertorque condition 2 Do you wish to check for the torque condition whenever the Drive is running or only at speed agree Nuisance detection during acceleration when variable torques are normally required can be avoided 3 Do you want the Drive to fault if the torque condition is detected or only alarm and continue operation The following table can help choose the proper setting for Torque Detection Selection 1 to get the wanted results Table 5 17 L6 01 Setting Choices L6 01 Overtorque Undertorque Fault Alarm Always Only Detected 0 Setting Detected Spd Agree 0 Torque Detection Disabled 1 X X X 2 X
12. o sr ow o 5 sp o mw ow o 0 TAT CURRENT 0 o wn tar Tou o wr wu tar rows o xw o o _ o um ug ra o o1 o ums up ia o ww 6 uwe ux ia muvTME o _ us tar pcvor o vr v o LOL i i AL ow o NO we or IA FAULT CODE 0 us ip womr 1 o UBD womr 1 o rur URGE FWDREV FWD REV FWD UF 2 Gx stor 3 o mv so Gs sor 1 9 RUN smr ipo cwpmUNsTP sr T o wo sc om ON or Ure 26 SPEED AGREE NO AGR AGREE NO AGR 01 12 ie 4 ES eae EUER ee ae es Revo J tocar peor E I ener a cs gom ue d m LEURRENTUM 3917 9 ae INE NE NE 0100080 m Ti un Tj Lux Tao LAO DE
13. 19 APOGEE FLN Point 20 APOGEE FLN Point List Summary 20 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input LAI Summary 23 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output LAO Summary 24 APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Input LDI Summary 25 APOGEE Logical Digital Output LDO Summary 25 Mailbox FUNCTION Polls nis sinu 26 Communications D 1 and Serial Communication The H O A selector keys must be in the AUTO position if serial communication is to be used for E7N run stop or speed control E7N serial communication may be used for any or all of the following monitoring and control functions Monitor Drive Parameters Control Drive Auto Run Stop Bypass Auto Run Stop Drive Auto Speed Command Drive Auto PI Setpoint If DIP switch 52 2 15 set to power up the E7N in the OFF mode the factory default and a serial communication run command exists then a DNE Drive Not Enabled alarm will be displayed when the unit 1s first powered Pressing HAND or AUTO will eliminate the alarm Pressing Reset or Menu will temporarily eliminate the alarm display and allow the user to continue with programming the Drive parameters Communications D 2 Using Modbus Communication Serial communication can be performed with Direct Digital Controllers DDCs or similar
14. Hand or Auto mode The relationship between the indicators for RUN and STOP and the Drive status is shown in Fig 3 2 RUN STOP Drive output frequency N STOP E STOP Frequency setting RUN xXx x STOP CO xx xx UC Lit 9 Blinking Not lit Fig 3 2 RUN and STOP Indicators Control Panel 3 5 Control Panel Indicator Lights LEDs B Control Power Status Indicator Table 3 6 Control Power Indicator One 3 Phase Power is applied to the Bypass unit and the control power transformer is functioning Off 3 Phase Power is disconnected from the Bypass unit or a control power transformer fuse has cleared B Drive Run Indicator Table 3 7 Drive Run Indicator The Drive has been given a run command in HAND or AUTO mode On Green d and the Bypass circuit is de energized The Drive has run command either the HAND or AUTO modes The unit may be operating in Bypass mode Bypass Run Indicator Table 3 8 Bypass Run Indicator The Bypass has been given a run command in the HAND or AUTO mode Or the operation has been remotely transferred to Bypass using the Remote Transfer to Bypass feature via a BAS contact closure at terminals TB1 4 and TB1 9 Or the operation has been automatically transferred to Bypass after a Drive fault condition via the DIP switch selectable Auto Transfer to Bypass feature 52 1
15. J D X 1 Note blank cell indicates the input be any of the possible positions don t care Definitions TB Terminal Block SX X DIP Switch Number X Closed Input Contacts 0 Open Input Contacts D Disabled Start Up and Operation 4 10 Control Panel LEDs Status LEDs Selector Button LEDs Drive Keypad LEDs DriveKeypadLEDs 1 Dive Bypass Smoke Drive Bypass Drive Auto Remote Purge Ready Run Fault Run Select Select HAND OFF AUTO Test FWD ALARM RUN STOP 1 j 4 11 _ 4 J Oo O On 1 On On On On On On On 1 1 On nn lash O On j 1 On On pe Oo On 0 On O Start Up and Operation 4 11 For additional influences on the Drive behavior in Drive operating mode consult Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 These tables explain the settings of Drive parameters required by the Bypass logic Table 5 1 and those that are also dependent upon the control options present on the unit Table 5 2 For Example In the second line of Table 5 2 for a Bypass equipped with no options and DIP switch 51 2 in the off position the hand mode speed command 15 based on the setting of d1 02 and the auto mode speed command signal is 0 10VDC Selector Key Functio
16. 10 Safety Interlock Circuit 10 Building Automation System Interlock Circuit Drive and Bypass enable input 10 Analog Inputs s eie peine o etek net pease Dite 12 Analog bestie des Gantt 14 Serial 15 Remote Transfer to Bypass 17 Smoke Purge 17 Multi Function Digital Inputs 0022 17 DIP Switch Programmable Functions Summary 18 5 to t re tt 19 CHECKS UL T TT 20 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions 20 Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions 21 WARO Diag ani tp p EET 23 Electrical 24 Electrical Installation 2 1 Termination Configuration Power Wiring The input disconnect switch is located in the upper right hand side of the Bypass unit The three phase input power connection is made to the input terminals of the disconnect See Figure 2 1 for a representative example The OverLoad Relay OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the bypass contactor The Bypass three phase
17. During reset signal input Drive Operation Status Int Ctl Sts 1 UI 12 During speed agree Drive operation ready me During fault detection Minor fault 1 During fault detection Major fault Cumulative Operation Time 01 13 Elapsed Time Displays total operating or power on time of the Drive Software Number 5 01 14 FLASH ID Displays Drive s software number 01 15 Terminal A1 Input Voltage Displays the input voltage on Terminal A1 as a percentage of Term 1 Level 10V DC 01 16 Terminal 2 Input Voltage Displays the input current or voltage on Terminal A2 as a Term A2 level percentage of 20mA or 10 V DC Parameters A 26 Table A 2 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Description No LCD Digital Operator Display 071 18 Motor Secondary Current 10 Displays the amount of current being used by the motor to Mot SEC Current produce torque Iq Output Frequency After Soft Start Displays the frequency reference speed command after the 01 20 SFS Output accel and decel ramps PI Feedback Value U1 24 PI Feedback Displays the feedback signal when PI control is used CPU Number T U1 28 CPU ID Displays control board hardware revision kWh U1 29 kWh Lo 4 Digits Displays the accumulated kWh MWh U1 30 kWh Hi 5 Digits Displays the accumulated MWh First Parameter Causing an OPE U1 34 OPE Detected Displays the parameter number causing a
18. On Amber Or the operation has been transferred to Bypass using the Smoke Purge feature via a contact closure at terminals TB1 5 and TB1 9 The motor is running at full speed across the line and the Drive 15 disconnected from the motor The Bypass has no run command in either the HAND or AUTO modes Off The unit may be operating in Drive mode Control Panel 3 6 Bypass Motor OL Indicator Table 3 9 Motor OL Indicator On Red The motor overload S10 on schematic E7N 00 has tripped OFF de energizing both the Drive and Bypass Circuits Off The motor overload S10 is satisfied Safeties Open Status Indicator Table 3 10 Safeties Open Indicator The NC motor safety circuit connected to terminals TB1 1 and TB1 9 On Red M pen circuit condition Off The NC motor safety circuit 1s satisfied or this function 1s disabled by DIP switch S2 7 B Drive Fault Indicator Table 3 11 Drive Fault Indicator On Red The Drive has tripped OFF due to an internal Drive fault Off The Drive is ready for operation or operating normally Smoke Purge Status Indicator Table 3 12 Smoke Purge Indicator The Smoke Purge function has been activated the building fire control On Amber system has closed a contact between terminals TB1 5 and 1 9 Smoke Purge is not active the Drive amp Bypass are operating normally Control Panel 3 7 B Auto Run Status Indicator Tab
19. PID OUT CAP 01 37 PID REF m 9 1501 COMFLTENA DISABLE 1 0 ENABLE DISABLE Hsos NN oa Reserraucr No 1 9 ser NO o tor Dmvcowzm 1 9 aver Nom 55 wo emmwanur o es 1 1 1 1 1 1 Communications D 22 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input LAI Summary Table D 14 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Input LAI Summary Drive to APOGEE FLN Point Drive oor a ER a 3 398 13535 1539 1 smE o o m m Lr cmm p us ores 3 13 1 e _ 9 39 EN RR RR RR RR RS RR RN oere 39 10 DRIVE KWH u lor 32767 U1 29 kVA Dep oven 3 UE Runt m o 9 f 9 9 Uns mcmusvorr vous 1 o 4 acourvorr vous fe Ure DRVRAIEDAMP KVADep 399i ie RUNTIME TOK mg 3 9 9 fos _ eee 3 9 oo et orea Hz 9 9 9 1 9 1 9 LLL LLL Le eem 9 7 4 oUrmEQrAUT _ 2 9 9 89 oron rep
20. gt B A1 01 Access Level Selection Seng 7 0 Operation Onl Advanced Level factory default A1 01 can be used to allow access to and permission to change all Drive parameters If the Drive is programmed for Operation Only A1 01 0 Operation then only the OPERATION and the PROGRAMMING menus are accessible Within the PROGRAMMING menu only parameters 1 01 1 04 are adjustable Programming 5 10 If A1 01 15 configured for Advanced Access A1 01 2 Advanced Level then all menus and all parameters are shown If the Access Level Selection is set to Advanced all parameters should be adjustable unless 1 The Drive parameters are password protected A1 04 which will prevent access to A1 00 through A1 03 and all A2 parameters 2 A digital input has been configured as a Program Lockout H1 0X 1B is active 3 During serial communication writing if a parameter change 15 also attempted via the digital operator BUSY WRITE PROTECTED message will display Parameter change will not be possible from the digital operator until an Enter command is received via the serial communication to finish the serial writing process B A1 03 Initialize Parameters Seng 0 No Initialize factory default 2220 2 Wire Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initialize The Drive can be set back to one of three default states via the A1 03 parameter Note The E7N application of the Drive employs 2
21. 0 0 to 110 0 100 0 Quick Setting Ref Upper Limit drive speed will be limited to this value This parameter applies to all speed command sources frequency Reterence Lower Determines minimum speed command set as a percentage of 42 02 Limit parameter E1 04 If speed command is below this value actual 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Quick Setting Ref Lower Limit drive speed will be set to this value This parameter applies to all speed command sources Determines the minimum speed command set as a percentage of parameter E1 04 If speed command 15 below this value actual drive speed will be set to this value This parameter only applies to analog inputs Al and A2 ump Frequencies 43 01 Jump Frequency 1 Jump Freq 1 These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration d3 02 ae e Fa of the motor machine This feature does not actually eliminate the pcd selected frequency values but will accelerate and decelerate the Jump Frequency 3 motor through the prohibited bandwidth d3 03 Jump Freq 3 This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency point A setting of 1 0 will result Master Speed Reference d2 03 Lower Limit Lower Limit 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 Programming Programming 0 0 to 200 0 Programming Programming 0 0 to 20 0 Programming MOP and Trim Control gt qure RECHNEN Trim Control Level 44
22. Closed drive runs in reverse at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Fault Reset Closed Resets the drive after the fault and the run command have been removed Fast Stop N O Closed Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Fast Stop N C Closed Normal operation Open Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status 3 2 wire Input for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 0 3 wire Used in conjunction with a multi function digital output PI Disable Turns off the PI controller and PI setpoint becomes speed command Program Lockout Closed All parameter settings can be changed Open Only speed command at U1 01 can be changed TrimCtl Increase Closed Increase motor speed by value in 44 02 Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using d1 01 thru d1 04 as a speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease Trim Ctl Decrease Closed Decrease motor speed by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal speed command Not effective when using d1 01 thru d1 04 as speed command Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase Parameters A 13 Menu Location Programming Parameter No H1 04 H1 05 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Terminal S6 Function Selection Terminal S6 Sel Terminal S7 Function Selection Terminal S7 Sel Table A 1 Parameter
23. PI Offset Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Motor Pre heat current in of drive rated current This is used to keep the motor warm to prevent condensation and is used in conjunction with a digital input data 60 Sets the DC preheat current for multi function output setting 80 Motor Preheat 2 as a percentage of Motor Rated Current 2 01 Speed Search Enables disables and selects the speed search function at start 0 SpdsrchF Disable Speed search at start is disabled estimated speed method is used at other times 1 SpdsrchF Enable Speed search is enabled estimated speed method 2 SpdsrchI Disable Speed search at start is disabled current detection method is used at other times 3 SpdscrhI Enable Speed search is enabled current detection method Estimated Speed Method Actual motor speed and direction is estimated then the motor is ramped from that speed to the commanded speed Current Detection Method Current level is monitored while output frequency is ramped down Used only when b3 01 3 Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage of drive rated current Used only when b3 01 3 Sets the deceleration time during speed search Delays the speed search operation after momentary power loss to allow time for an external output contactor to re energize 0 Disabled Enabled Delay Timers Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi function digital ou
24. deles o3 M 54 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function 60 LS otall s ea te e 61 4 Speed Command Loss Detection 64 Sla E needa tee eee 65 L6 Torque Detection 67 L8 Hardware Protection 2 22 22 69 01 Monitor Configuration 71 02 Key Selections ausos ebd 75 Digital Operator Copy Function 78 LU Pres M 80 Programming 5 1 Regarding Chapter 5 Standard LED Keypad Display and Optional LCD Keypad Display This programming chapter has been written to cover both the standard LED keypad display and the optional LCD keypad display When referring to the keypad display the complete description of the parameter setting choices are presented for clarity purposes For example one of the setting choices for parameter b1 02 is 1 terminals Keep in mind that for the standard LED keypad display only the number of the choice will be shown The optional LCD keypad display is required to see the complete description Some sections of this chapter will apply only to the optional LCD operator for example A1 00 Language Selection 01 05 1001 08 LCD Display
25. e ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB J1 1 2 Electrical Overview Control Board Cat 5 Cable w RJ 45 connectors Ribbon Cable For signals Ribbon between cable for drive and LEDs and PCB A2 switches for H O A control Membrane Keypad for H O A Control Customer Control Terminal Blocks Electronic Bypass Control Panel Components Contactors PCB A2 Control Xfmr Motor OL Fig 2 11 E7N Electronic Control Interconnection of Components Electrical Installation 2 25 Notes Electrical Installation 2 26 Chapter 3 Control Panel This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Control Panel Digital Operator and Control Panel Display 2 Digital Operator and H O A Control Panel Keys 3 Drive Digital Operator Keypad 4 Control Panel Indicator Lights LEDs 6 Selector Key Indicators e e i d ase es 9 Normal Control Panel 5 9 Abnormal Control Panel 5 9 Fault Control Panel Indicators 10 Div Malh MEN S e S 11 Main Menu Structure 12 DRIVE Operation Menu 0 2 0002002 13 QUI
26. 100 Output Frequency 0 Drive Output Voltage gt Interrupted Ignored Run Command OPEN Minimum Baseblock Time 12 03 Operation Wait Time Minimum 100 Maximum Output Output Frequency Frequency Timer Value T Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Fig 5 5 Coast to Stop with Timer Programming 5 15 B b1 04 Reverse Operation Setting E o ww l Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled factory default 1 2 Exchange Phase 3 3 ExchgPhs Rev Dbl For some applications reverse motor rotation is not applicable and may even cause problems e g air handling units pumps etc Setting parameter b1 04 to 1 or 3 will cause the Drive to ignore any inputs for reverse operation Setting parameter b1 04 to either 2 or 3 will change the motor shaft rotation when a Forward Run command is given by exchanging the order of the output phasing The factory default setting of parameter b1 04 15 1 Disabled When b1 04 1 Disabled reverse operation is prohibited and no exchanging of output phasing occurs It s not immediately apparent how to program a reverse run function on the E7N Cooling tower defrost initiated by a BAS con tact closure is an example Here is one way to accomplish this As the unit ships from the factory Drive terminals S6 and S7 are the only ones available for customer use All others are used for the bypass logic circuit dry contact i
27. HxW 24 D002 EBENE S 1 ES 41 43 8 38 11 5 40 29 H 10 6 3 D010 1052 3 212 9 292 1 7 14 W 24 2 E 59 4 D059 rM 12212 15 49 51 27 H B ANM MER M 1330 4 391 9 361 9 12 39 W Input 1 1 001 1 6 1 2 7 6 5 8007 1052 3 212 9 7 14 W 480 M B034 8040 5238 15 43 1425 51 27 H 52 49 08052 19904 on 35619 adio 65 50 065 1 Horsepower rating is based on standard NEMA B 4 pole motor design 2 Height dimension includes the mounting screw tabs 3 Data represents the total weight of the drive with all possible standard options not shipping weight Physical Installation 1 17 Drawing ber DD E7N 203 01 DD E7N 255 01 DD E7N 203 01 DD E7N 255 01 Weight Ibs 9 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Checking and Controlling Installation Site Install the Bypass unit as described below and maintain the specified operating conditions Installation Site Location of the Bypass unit 1s important to achieving proper performance and design operating life Install the Bypass unit as close as possible to the motor The NEMA type 1 enclosed units should be installed in an area where it will be protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture corrosive gasses or liquids vibration and dust or metallic particles The ambient air available for cooling the unit should be 104 F 40 C
28. RUN CMD at PRG Selects if run command is accepted in DRIVE Opera Enabled pee yp tion menu only or in all menus 41 01 10 0 HZ Frequency Reference 1 Hand Mode Speed Reference Reference 1 0 60 used with serial communication see Table 5 2 and __ _ ie 41 02 HZ Frequency Reference 2 Hand Mode Speed Reference Reference 2 0 60 used without serial communication see Table 5 2 and 1 01 208 480 480 VOLTS Input Voltage Setting Set to the nominal Voltage Set Input Voltage range ee 1 05 208 230 208 VOLTS Output Volts Setting Set to the nominal Voltage Rat Output Voltage range ERN WE NER H1 01 70 24 N A Drive Terminal 53 Function Selection Set for Drive Terminal 53 Sel Drive a RN H1 02 SEE 14 N A Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection Set for fault Terminal 54 Sel Multi C 7 mme memo teu H1 03 SEE 3 N A Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection Set For Fre Terminal S5 Sel Multi ew H2 02 A Drive Terminals M3 M4 Function Selection Set for Term 3 4 Sel Com serial communication run command RUN Command H3 08 SEE p Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal selection 0 to Term A2 Signal 0 10 TABLE 5 2 10 VDC Drive control board switch S1 2 off or 4 to 20 mA Drive control board switch S1 2 on N A
29. Reduce the ambient temperature Flashing parameter L8 02 heating unit in close proximity ard ihe Dave to Drive is present Remove the heating unit An external overheat condition Check for an external condition Drive overheat pre alarm signal is input exists connected to one of the from a multi function digital input terminal multi function input terminals Verify the program parameters S3 54 55 S6 S7 H1 01 thru H1 05 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Recheck the accel decel time C1 01 and C1 02 Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 OH3 Motor Overheating Alarm thru E1 13 Motor Overheat 1 The Drive stops or continues operation Overheating of motor Flashing according to the setting of L1 03 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Check the digital operator connector Verify the setting of 02 06 Drive Internal Cooling Fan OH2 Over Heat 2 Flashing Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 14 Table 6 4 Alarm Displays Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications OV DC Bus Overvoltage ree ee ee DC Bus Overvolt 208 240VAC Trip point is gt 400Vdc a gs CETTE Extend the time in C1 02 Flashing 480VAC Trip point is 2 800Vdc High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input
30. SN AN 11 Read permitted selection DATA ur Eur ENTER x PUE IIIA e DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE ESC eo eoe DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Fig 3 6 Operations in Advanced Programming Menu Control Panel 3 18 gt Use A y and keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list For a complete parameter list see Appendix A Parameter Group Functions Al Initialization A2 User Parameters bl Sequence b2 DC Braking b3 Speed Search b4 Delay Timers b5 Control b8 Energy Saving Accel Decel C2 S Curve Acc Dec C4 Torque Comp C6 Carrier Freq dl Preset Reference d2 Reference Limits d3 Jump Frequencies d4 Sequence d6 Field Weakening E1 V F Pattern E2 Motor Setup F6 Setup Digital Inputs H2 Digital Outputs H3 Analog Inputs H4 Analog Outputs H5 Serial Com Setup 11 Motor Overload L2 PwrLoss Ridethru L3 Stall Prevention L4 Ref Detection L5 Fault Restart L6 Torque Detection L8 Hdwe Protection nl Hunting Prev n3 HighSlip ol Monitor Select o2 Key Selections o3 COPY Function Control Panel 3 19 VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters Menu Verify menu is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming menu or by autotuning None will be displayed if no settings have been changed For the initialization parameters on
31. Sets the amount of frequency reference reduction when an Overheat Pre alarm OH is detected Selects the drive response upon failure of the internal cooling fan 0 Disabled FAN alarm is displayed Enabled OHI fault occurs Oor 1 Oor 1 0 0 to 100 0 Oor 1 20 0 Programming Programming Programming Programming Hunting Prev i 7 0 Disabled Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Enabled Hunting prevention function enabled If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded hunting prevention may reduce the vibration There is a loss of responsiveness if hunting prevention is enabled Gain setting for the Hunting Prevention Function If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1 01 1 increase the gain by 0 1 until vibration ceases If the motor stalls while 1 01 1 decrease the gain by 0 1 until the stalling ceases Parameters A 22 Oor 1 0 00 to 2 50 Programming Parameter No n3 01 n3 02 n3 03 n3 04 NENNEN Monitor Select User Monitor Selection User Monitor Sel 01 01 01 02 01 03 01 05 Parameter LCD Digital Operator Display High Slip Braking Deceleration Frequency Width HSB Decel Width High Slip Braking Current Limit HSB Current Ref High Slip Braking Dwell Time at Stop HSB DwelTim Stp High Slip Braking Overload Time HSB OL Time User Monitor Selection After Power Up Power On Monitor Digital Operator Display Sele
32. Un _ A 7 8 9Urvounr vous 9 f o _ a 0 E NN L3 p wr wr 3 9 ERR CD ERROR STATUS Ef Communications D 23 APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output LAO Summary Table D 15 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Output LAO Summary APOGEE FLN to Drive Point Number Database Descriptor Units Intercept Default Min oae 7 313 358 DE x 0 0 3i acEmwE s wu E 3 ec TIME ELK gt lt Drive Parameter 5 01 NO CA 5 1500 E2 01 32767 01 32767 02 L9 36 STALE PERN xr 9 3 9 19 15 mEQUPHM T rT 399 9 eer 0 5 wra Zo NO 0 13 02 d3 01 9 fz guwerREQEW Hz 91 1 L3 d3 03 d3 04 i f o f o LL 9 wose se 9 9 _ x qn 77 omo 1 9L 1 25 5 L2 02 b1 02 3 b1 01 eros 1 9 1 9 L9 398 o woe 4 9 9 9 0 e o o 41 02 5 02 a mnm s 4 39 f 3 1 89 x R RRAMNUM 3 2 w u
33. Check load conditions Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat Check for dirt build up on the The temperature of the Drive cooling fin Cooling fan s are not fans and cooling fins OH1 exceeded the temperature programmed working high ambient Reduce the ambient temperature Heatsnk MAX Temp parameter L8 02 and L8 03 0 2 temperature a heat source is around the Drive t 1 to the Drive Remove the heating unit Replace Drive Internal Cooling Fan the cooling fan Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load sic Recheck the accel decel time otor Overheatin arm OH3 DOS gt r Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overheat 1 E E measured by motor thermistor according to the setting of L1 03 Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru 1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load u Recheck the accel decel time otor Overheating Fault OH4 eque i Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overheat 2 e Stops Operation according to Me measured by motor thermistor setting of L1 04 y Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 thru 1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 The load is too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time is too short at the size of the load as well as the accel decel time times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overload Designed to protect the motor The voltage of
34. L2 03 Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired the Drive will inject DC current into the motor wind ings to lock the motor shaft The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency at the time the Run command is removed DC Injection Brake Time ON b2 04 x 10 OFF 100 Output Frequency 0 62 04 x 10 x Output Frequency Maximum Frequency 1 04 OPEN 2 E 5 46 Drive Output Voltage Interrupted T a b2 04 DC Injection Brake a pa H Minimum Baseblock DC Injection Brake Time 4 100 Time 12 03 02 04 10 Output Frequency Fig 5 4 DC Injection Braking to Stop If an overcurrent OC fault occurs during DCInj to Stop lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time 12 03 until the fault no longer occurs 3 Coast w Timer When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to a stop If a Run command is input before time T Operation Wait Time expires the Drive will not run and the Run command will need to be cycled before operation can occur The time T Operation Wait Time is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and the active deceleration time C1 02 ON Deceleration OFF Time C1 02
35. Serial Flt Dtct 1 Enabled If communications are lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5 09 a communications fault will occur 5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the time from when the drive receives data to when 5 to 65 Bie cs Transmit WaitTIM the drive sends data 5 5 5 05 0 or 1 Programming 5 07 RTS Control Selection Enables or disables request to send RT S control 0 Disabled RTS is always on Oor 1 Programming RTS Control Sel 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending er Selects the communication protocol 0 Memobus Modbus H5 08 T 1 N2 Metasys 0 to 2 Programming 2 FLN APOGEE 0 to 10 0 Determines how long communications must be lost 5 08 0 Communication Error before fault is annunciated Works in conjunction with 0 to 10 0 5 09 Detection Time 2 0sec Programming parameters 5 05 and H5 04 5 08 1 Detect Time 0 to 90 0 H5 08 2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running After these parameters are changed drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect Hex see page A 30 Parameters A 18 Parameter No Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Motor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select L1 01 Motor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Const L1 02 Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection Mtr OH Alarm Sel L1 03 Motor Overh
36. Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Factory Default 1 0 Applies a multiplier to the output of the PI function Using the gain can be helpful when the PI function is used to trim the Speed Command Increasing b5 10 causes the PI function to have a greater regulating affect on the speed command B b5 11 Reverse Selection Sating L3 502 0 Limit factory default Parameter b5 11 determines whether reverse operation 15 allowed while using PI control b5 0140 The factory default setting will not allow the Drive to run in reverse This parameter does not need to be changed from factory default for a majority of HVAC applications Refer also to b5 09 B b5 12 PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Setting 0 Disabled factory default Loss of feedback can cause problems to a PI application The Drive can be programmed to turn on a digital output whenever a loss of feedback occurs Feedback Loss Detection is turned on by 55 12 When 65 12 1 Alarm the Drive acknowledges the loss of feedback without stopping or turning on the fault output If b5 12 2 Fault the Drive coasts to a stop and turns on the fault output if the feedback 15 determined to be lost Programming 5 31 B b5 13 Feedback Loss Detection Level Setting Range 0 100 Factory Default 0 B b5 14 Feedback Loss Detection Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 0 Seconds Factory Default 1 0 Seconds The Drive interprets feedba
37. These are the only parameters accessible for the user level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function Setting Range 0 to 6 0 to 2 3330 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 c b1 01 to 03 02 Factory Setting Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Parameters 2 Parameter No A2 07 A2 08 A2 09 A2 10 A2 11 A2 12 A2 13 A2 14 A2 15 A2 16 A2 17 A2 18 A2 19 A2 20 A2 21 A2 22 A2 23 A2 24 A2 25 A2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 32 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display User Parameter 7 User Param 7 User Parameter 8 User Param 8 User Parameter 9 User Param 9 User Parameter 10 User Param 10 User Parameter 11 User Param 11 User Parameter 12 User Param 12 User Parameter 13 User Param 13 User Parameter 14 User Param 14 User Parameter 15 User Param 15 User Parameter 16 User Param 16 User Parameter 17 User Param 17 User Parameter 18 User Param 18 User Parameter 19 User Param 19 User Parameter 20 User Param 20 User Parameter 21 User Param 21 User Parameter 22 User Param 22 User Parameter 23 User Param 23 User Parameter 24 User Param 24 User Param
38. User Initialize is no longer a available in A1 03 B 02 05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection Seting 0 Enabled factory default The factory default setting of the Frequency Reference Setting Method parameter 2 05 1 Enabled dictates that when setting a Speed Command via the digital operator mode it is not necessary to press the DATA ENTER key before the Drive will begin to accelerate or decelerate to the new set speed This 15 referred to as Motor Operated Potentiometer type functionality When 2 05 1 Enabled the speed command is stored to memory 5 seconds after the INCREASE or DECREASE keys are released When 2 05 0 Disabled the digital operator INCREASE and DECREASE keys will change the speed command but the Drive will not accelerate or decelerate to the new speed command until the DATA ENTER key is pressed In order to change the Speed Command in the HAND mode U1 01 must be the top monitor and then the ENTER key must be pressed in order to access the Speed Command function This in not to be confused with pressing the ENTER key in order to achieve a change in speed using the INCREASE and DECREASE keys which is the subject of parameter 02 05 Programming 5 75 02 06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Seting o Disbled Enabled factory default Leaving 02 06 enabled will cause the Drive to fault when the digital operat
39. below before a Zero Speed condition is considered true This affects any digital output configured as a Zero Speed signal 2 0 1 Zero Speed DC injection O Output Frequency Fig 5 6 DC Injection Braking During Stopping Programming 5 17 B b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current Setting Range to 100 Factory Default 50 The level of DC Injection Braking Current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft Increasing the level of current will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings and should only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft DC Injection current 15 set in percentage of Drive rated output current Drive rated output current is stated on the Drive nameplate B b2 03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start b2 04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default b2 03 5 00 Seconds b2 04 0 00 Seconds b2 03 15 one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 The Drive can be programmed to automatically DC Inject for a predetermined amount of time prior to accelerating to speed b2 03 and or at the end of a Ramp to stop b2 04 Parameter b2 03 can be used to stop a rotating motor prior to attempting acceleration 1 e a wind milling fan If DC Injection braking at start or Speed Search is not enabled attempting to Drive a spinning motor may cause nuisance t
40. or less Wall mount units require a minimum 6 inch clearance above and below to achieve adequate heat sink cooling No side clearance is required for cooling because the cooling air flow is in and out of the enclosure door at the front surface of the unit do not block the air flow louvers Clearance for the opening swing of the enclosure door should be considered when placing these units The door is hinged on the left and must open through at least a 90 degree swing with a 120 to 180 degree swing being preferable minimum clearance is 1 5 Install the Bypass unit under the following conditions in UL pollution degree 1 amp 2 environments This excludes wet locations where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contaminant loading Table 1 6 Installation Site Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Plenum Rated NEMA Type 1 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Observe the following precautions when mounting the Bypass unit Install the Bypass unit in a clean location that is free from oil mist and dust Install the Bypass unit in an environment where metal shavings oil water or other foreign matter will not get into the Bypass enclosure Install the Bypass unit in a location free from radioactive materials Install the Bypass unit in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids Install the Bypass unit in a location without excessive vibration Install the Bypass unit in a loc
41. or remote Auto mode sources Press the MENU key until the ADV PRGM menu LED red is lit From here any of the E7 parameters can be accessed and changed using the A Y and DATA ENTER keys See Appendix A for a list of programmable features The VERIFY menu can be used to review or modify only those parameters that have been changed from the Drive s default values Using the A Y and DATA ENTER keys as needed verify that the parameters are correct for the Drive and installation conditions See the Factory Parameter Settings printed in Table 1 and Table 6 on page 2 and 3 of the E7N 00 Schematic Diagram or Chapter 5 Table 5 1 and 5 2 of this manual Consider any additional parameter settings that may be needed by this specific application The Factory Parameter Settings table 1 of DS E7N 01 documents E7 Drive parameter settings required to interface with the Bypass logic circuit that have been established at the factory and stored in a dedicated location in the E7 memory as User Initialization values think of it as a back up file If additional parameters are set to the specific needs of the application project and the system operation has been checked and verified then the User Initialization values should be stored in memory again by entering 1 Set Default in parameter 02 03 When there 15 a need for re initialization resetting to a known factory starting point for troubleshooting purposes of the E7N Drive then a 2
42. output frequency 2 Output Freq 100 max output frequency 3 Output Current 100 drive rated current 6 Output Voltage 100 230V or 100 460V 7 DC Bus Voltage 100 400V or 100 800V 8 Output k Watts 100 drive rated power 15 Term A1 Level 16 Term A2 Level AME Mob 18 Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary Terminal AM Sel current 1 to 53 Programming 20 SFS Output 100 max output frequency 24 PI Feedback 31 Not Used 36 PI Input 37 PI Output 100 max output frequency 38 PI Setpoint 51 Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 52 Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 53 PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output AM gain setting H4 05 E 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 50 094 iuc cu Terminal AM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 us that parameter can be changed when the drive is running H4 04 Parameters A 17 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Descr Setting Factory Menu LCD Digital Operator Display p Range Setting Location a aaa Analog Outputs a a H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10V 110 0 to 0 0 Terminal Bias when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 Terminal FM Signal Level 0 0 10 VDC H4 07 Selection 2 4 20 mA 0 or 2 AO Level Select1 0 0 10 VD
43. strategy for building pressure control is an example The Drive can be programmed to maintain a set differential between two analog signals If input A2 is configured as a PI Differential Mode H3 09 16 PI Differential then the Drive will maintain a set difference between the measurements read on inputs TB3 3 configured for Drive Terminal Al and TB5 9 Drive Terminal 2 This differential setpoint is programmed by parameter b5 07 B b5 01 PI Mode Setting 0 Disabled factory default Enable Rep The Drive can be used as a stand alone PI controller If PI functionality 15 selected by parameter b5 01 the Drive will adjust its output to cause the feedback from a transmitter to match the PI setpoint b5 19 The setting of b5 01 will determine whether PI functionality is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled enabled b5 01 1 Enabled or enable with the output of the PI function used to trim a Speed Command 65 01 3 Fref PI B 65 02 Proportional Gain Setting Setting Range 0 00 to 25 00 Factory Default 2 00 The proportional gain will apply a straight multiplier to the calculated difference error between the PI Setpoint and the measured transmitter feedback at terminal A2 A large value will tend to reduce the error but may cause instability oscillations if too high A small value may allow to much offset between the setpoint and feedback See Figure 5 16 on following page B 65 03 Integral Tim
44. z 94 9 mbreEBACK 9 fom 9 i mron 1 __ 994 9 i a o mrm s 9 9 89 7 6 m PIDMODESEL DISABLE i 9 ENABLE DISABLE prar TOT iar raemr 9 __ _ 9 Hz ww 9 ___ ourcukmu _ 9 __ _ o L5 ppepemewww T7135 Liu 52 puo E E E E E E E io of 1 1 9 o FINS MON ____ Noro tar 9 9 Us ia wcmunur i 9 dT LUE 9 9 Us ON O_O er 4 9 _ puo w S a 9 m 09 39 uo wprBRMDL of cr 3 9 PraRMDT 1 E i 9 1 86 Communications D 21 Table 0 13 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Point Number Summary Continued Point Point Point Name Factory Default Engr Units Slope Intercept On Off Drive Number Type SI Units SI Units SI Units Units Parameter 87
45. 00 Dive _ x ERE i2 H Die E J X x Bypass Flash H J Divo 50 x x j Cs 4 A Die KX A Die X D x rive Pn 166 A Drive X D _ E x None o A Die X D E x None On A Die X X D x Bypass on A Die X X D x X j A Die E J X X j X x Fah On A Bypass X D 1 J X J X X j Bypas On 2 A Bypass T X D X x OO 22 A Bypass X D E 1 X o j Oo 244 A Bypass X D 10 X S on 25 Bypass X X _ J X x Bypass 050 X D 1 1 x 27 0 Bypass 050 x D x x Bypass 28 Drive cx qo Te eX Tr 9 A Bypass X D None 300 H Drive D 1 Nome 32 H Bypass N D D 1 X 9 Dive 1 D
46. 02 Trim Control Lvl Set the percentage of maximum speed to be added or subtracted via 0 to 100 10 multi function inputs 43 04 Jump Frequency Width Jump Bandwidth in a deadband of 1 0 Hz Parameters A 9 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Parameter No Setting Factory Menu LCD Digital Operator Description Range Setting Location Display V F Pattern 155 to 255 0 240V 310 to 510 0 480V Input Voltage Setting 240V a Input Voltage Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line Quick Setting 480 50Hz 60 Hz Saturation 50 Hz Saturation 72 Hz 50 Hz VTI 50 Hz VT2 60 Hz VT1 V F Pattern Selection 60 Hz VT2 V F Selection 50 Hz HSTI 50 Hz HST2 60 Hz HSTI 60 Hz HST2 90 Hz 120 Hz Custom V F F Custom w o limit E1 03 Programming Maximum Output Frequency DES Max Frequency 60 0Hz Programming Output voltage V 0 to 255 0 Maximum Output Voltage VMAX 240V Max Voltage E1 05 0 to 510 0 480V VBASE Base Frequency 1 1 0 0 to Base Frequency ce 200 0 230 0V E1 05 Programming 460 0V Programming E1 06 60 0Hz E1 07 3 0Hz Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A 0 0 to 200 0 0 to 255 0 Mid Output Voltage A 240V Mid Voltage A 0 to 510 0 480V Programming E1 08 18 0VAC Programming Minimum Output Frequency FMIN FA FBASE FMAX Man trequency 1 09 1 07 1 06 1 04 Frequency Hz E1 0
47. 04 Max Voltage E1505 Mid Voltage B E f 12 sites na Base Voltage E1 1 3 OPEP DRE j Mid Voltage E1 08 Min Voltage E1 10 E1 09 1 07 Et 06 E1 11 1 04 Frequency Min Mid Base Max Freq FreqA Freq FreqB Freq Fig 5 23 Custom V f Pattern Programming Curve Increasing the voltage in the V f pattern increases the available motor torque However when setting a custom V f pattern increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current to prevent Drive faults as a result of motor over excitation e Motor overheating or excessive vibration E2 Motor Setup B E2 01 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent see appendix Factory Default Model Dependent The Motor Rated Current parameter E2 01 is necessary information for the Drive motor protection function The motor over load protection parameter L1 01 15 enabled by default In addition motor rated current is used by the torque compensation func tion to insure optimum torque production Set E2 01 to the full load amps FLA value stamped on the motor s nameplate During Auto tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor rated current parameter T1 04 on the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 04 will be also written into E2 01 For applications employing a Drive that is oversized for the motor E2 01 ma
48. 05 Bona Gum Sets d relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when 0 to 99 Prosramiming 4 5 C6 02 CarrierFreq Gain Preset Reference Speeds 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 Digital preset speed command 1 Used when b1 01 0 and when Reference 1 in hand mode Setting units are affected by 01 03 d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 Digital preset speed command 2 Selected via multi function input Reference 2 terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 41 03 Frequency Reference 3 Digital preset speed command 3 Selected via multi function input Reference 3 terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 Digital preset speed command 4 Selected via multi function input Reference 4 terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 0 00Hz Programming 0 00Hz Programming 0 00Hz Programming 0 00Hz Programming 41 17 Jog Frequency Reference Speed command used when a jog is selected via multi function 6 00Hz Programming Jog Reference input terminals Setting units are affected by 01 03 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Parameters A 8 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter 4 Setting Factory Menu igital Operator Display Range Setting Location Reference Limits Determines maximum speed command set as a percentage of Frequency Reference Upper arameter 1 04 If speed command is above this value actual d2 01 Limit p
49. 15 inappropriate The Drive does not operate until the parameter is set correctly Alarm output and fault contact do not operate If an OPE occurs change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6 5 Table 6 5 OPE Error and Fault Displays Digital Operator Corrective The control board was replaced Enter the correct kVA setting 02 04 Drive kVA setting error and the kVA parameter is set by referring to the Drive model incorrectly number in Appendix B Constant data out of range a i e Verify the program settings Duplicate functions are selected up down commands or trim control increase decrease not set Verify program settings Terminal ME aye vom simultaneously Speed search from H1 01 H1 05 maximum frequency and set frequency are set simultaneously OPEO1 kVA Selection t Serial communication option board is not installed option board is installed incorrectly The run com mand selection parameter B1 02 is set to 3 and option board is not installed Verify that the board is installed Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more Run command is selected through serial communication at 2CN but option board is not installed 05 Sequence Select Check parameters E1 04 1 11 OPE10 V f parameter settings are not set A minimum frequency voltage value V f Ptrn Setting correctly may be set higher than the maximum
50. 2 to TB5 7 This is essential for serial com applications and benign for all other applications Programming 5 6 Discussion of Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings Drive Parameter Settings for Various Combinations of Bypass and Options Notes See Appendix D Communications for additional information on serial communication Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key The HAND OFF AUTO selector keys must be in AUTO position if serial communication is to be used to control the Drive For monitoring only of Drive parameters and operation via serial communication the user needs only to set up the 5 0 Serial Com Setup parameters other parameters may remain as they were factory programmed for the Bypass unit and options Option L LonWorks serial communication always requires DIP switch S1 1 terminating resistor to be ON See the LonWorks Option Installation Guide IG AFD 20 LONWORKS for additional parameter setting instructions Options J U or V require a terminating resistor only when the Drive is the last device on the serial communication chain To add a speed potentiometer at terminals TB3 1 to TB3 3 for HAND mode speed command Configure terminal TB3 3 to connect to Drive terminal 1 by placing switch 51 3 in the Off position and switch S1 4 in the On position For an E7N with no options as in line 2 of Table 5 2 change to hav
51. 3 3 D lt Table D 10 Metasys N2 Analog Output Summary Metasys N2 to E7 Object 1D aw MMODESEEECT 0 S S S 5 AO TZ FREQUENCYCOMMANDLOWERLIMIT WorMAX o O JUMPFREQUENCYT O AOIS JUMPFREQUENCY2 O JUMPFREQUENCY3 oe O AOT JUMPFREQUENCYBANDWIDTH ome NUMBEROFAUTORESTARTS TT A020 AO 21 CABLE LOSS TIME OUT aon CABLELOSS SPEED 0 00 A023 A023 26 120 120 100 0 1 1 E 41 1 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 mos PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE MISSING DETECTION SELECT PU PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE MISSING DETECTION LEVEL FEEDBACK REFERENCE i MISSING DETECTION TIME EC AO 30 READ PARAMETER NUMBER EE AO31 WRITE PARAMETER NUMBER 32 WRITE PARAMETER DATA Communications D 17 E7 Parameter 01 02 55 02 55 03 L3 06 L3 02 b1 01 b1 02 b5 01 d2 01 d2 02 E2 01 d3 01 d3 02 d3 03 d3 04 L5 01 01 03 L2 02 H5 09 d1 04 b5 04 b5 06 b5 07 b5 08 b5 12 b5 13 b5 14 Metasys 2 Binary Input BI Summary Table 0 11 Metasys N2 Binary Input Summary E7 to Metasys 2 Object Name RUN STOP MONITOR FORWARD REVERSE MONITOR FAULT MONITOR MINOR FAULT MAJOR FAULT DRIVE COMMUNICATION BID __MULTEFUNCTIONOUTPUTT mf BI 11 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT 2 2 02 SAFETY CLEAR SAFETY SET TERMINAL 3 CLOSED TERMINA
52. 3 09 3 o 4 oo a d en d ON 1 2 3 4 Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi step speeds Shown for H3 13 0 Main Fref TAI Al and A2 are reversed if H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 The determination of whether the Preset Speed 1 will be the Frequency Reference 1 41 01 or the analog input A1 15 determined by the status of b1 01 Ifb1 01 1 Terminals the value of the input to Al will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 1 is selected If b1 0141 the setting of d1 01 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 1 is selected The determination of Preset Speed 2 1s made much the same way as Preset Speed 1 except that the setting of parameter H3 09 decides whether the analog input A2 or 41 02 is Preset Speed 2 If H3 09 2 Aux Reference the value of the input to 2 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected If H3 09z2 the setting of 41 02 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected B Function Fault Reset Setting 14 Whenever the Drive detects a fault condition the fault output contact will close and the Drive s output will shut OFF causing the motor to coast specific stopping methods can be selected for some faults such as L1 04 for motor overheat Once the Run command is removed the fault can be reset by either the RESET key on the digital operator or by closing a digital input confi
53. 3 Mon Selectable those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters 01 07 and 01 08 and will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the INCREASE and DECREASE keys DRIVE PI Feedback Active Monitor Title Active Monitor U1 24 U1 37 0 00 eeu 01 07 37 Optional LCD Operator For Example The Display above showing PI Feedback PI Output and PI Setpoint would be useful when setting up a PI Control Loop Programming 5 4 02 Key Selections B 02 03 User Parameter Default Value Seting o No Chane Ser Defaults Clear All The Drive gives the option of configuring any and all of the programming parameters and then saving the parameters as User Initialization Values After configuring the Drive set parameter 02 03 1 Set Defaults to save the parameters to a User Initialization memory location Once this has been done the Initialize Parameters parameter A 1 03 will offer the choice of 1110 User Initialize Choosing 1 03 1110 User Initialized will reset all modified parameters back to what they were the last time they were saved using 02 03 The choice of setting A1 03 1110 User Initialized 1s unavailable until first setting the User Initialization parameters using 02 03 Once a User Initialization is set saved it can be cleared by setting 02 03 2 Clear All After clearing the User Initialization parameters the choice of 1110
54. 40P4 to 4018 CIMR 4030 1 2 Hp to 30 Hp 40Hp amp 50Hp Note 1 Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the wiring Drive and or personal injury 2 Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives 3 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification Electrical Installation 2 7 Control Wiring Bypass Field Control Wire Landing The Bypass field control wiring is terminated on the control 2 Terminal blocks through TBS The terminal desig nations are labeled on the enclosure adjacent to PCB A2 see Figure 2 4 Route the control wiring as shown in Figure 2 3 Fig 2 4 1 Control Terminal Locations All Models efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 8 Annunciation Contacts Contacts for customer use are provided and wired to and 2 as follows for use as annunciators of Bypass unit operation All are 5 amp at 120 VAC contacts Table 2 4 Output Relays Factory Defaults Function Name E7N 00 Terminai Block Motor Run Motor Run TB1 10 11 Form A Hand Mode Relay 1 0 1 12 13 14 Form Auto Mode Relay 2 TB2 1 2 3 Form C System Fault Relay 3 TB2 4 5 6 Form C Dedicated Programmable Programmable Outp
55. 5 16 B 61 08 Run Command Selection During Programming Sting o Da Enabled factory default As a convenience to the user the Drive will respond to a Run input even when the digital operator is being used to adjust parameters If it is necessary that external Run commands not be recognized while the Drive is being programmed set b1 08 0 Disabled B b1 11 Drive Delay Time Setting Setting Range 0 to 600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds If a time is set into parameter b1 11 the Drive will delay executing any run command until b1 11 time has expired During Drive delay time execution the digital operator will display DDLY Waiting to RUN Both the ALARM and Run indicators will blink while the Drive waits to execute the Run command b2 DC Braking The DC Braking Group contains parameters associated with the DC injection braking feature Parameters involving the start ing frequency current level braking time and motor pre heat current level are located here B b2 01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Factory Default 0 5 Hz Parameter b2 01 sets the output frequency where the Drive begins DC Injection during Ramp to stop in order to lock the rotor of the motor and established the end point of the ramp If b2 01 E1 09 Minimum Frequency then DC Injection begins at 1 09 Parameter 52 01 also determines the output frequency that the Drive must be at
56. 6E 24 Programming Jog Freq Ref Closed speed command from d1 17 Open speed command determined by b1 01 Multi Acc Dec 1 Closed Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 03 amp C1 04 Open Accel amp Decel Ramps determined by C1 01 amp C1 02 Ext BaseBlk N O Closed Output transistors forced off Open Normal operation 9 Ext BaseBlk N C Closed Normal Operation Open Output transistors forced off Acc Dec Ramp Hold Closed Acceleration suspended and speed held Open Normal Operation Term A2 Enable Closed Terminal A2 is active Open Terminal A2 is disabled F Term Not Used Terminal has no effect 10 MOP Increase Terminal 54 Function Closed Speed Command Increases 1 02 Selection Open Speed Command Held Terminal 84 Sel Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1 02 must 0 to 6E 14 Programming be set to 1 11 MOP Decrease Closed Speed Command Decreases Open Speed Command Held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1 02 must be set to 1 Setting Factory Menu Range Setting Location 1 01 Continued on following page Parameters A 12 Parameter Parameter Name N LCD Digital Operator O Display Terminal S5 Function Selection Terminal S5 Sel Timer Function Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Factory Range Setting Description Forward Jog Closed drive runs forward at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Reverse Jog
57. C1 01 and C1 02 are the factory default active accel decel pair Another accel decel pair C1 03 and C1 04 exists that can be activated by a multi function digital input H1 0x 7 or specified by a switch over frequency as programmed in parameter 1 11 Note In fan applications employing duct high pressure safety limit switches it may be necessary to further adjust the deceleration time to avoid high pressure limit trips due to damper closure as the system 15 shut down an alternate solution in this situation is to set parameter b1 03 to Coast to Stop C1 09 Fast Stop Time Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 10 0 Seconds A special deceleration parameter is available for use with emergency or fault operations Parameter C1 09 will set a special deceleration that can be operated by closing a digital input configured as 0 15 or 0 17 A digital input configured as H1 0x 15 will look for a switch closure before initiating the Fast Stop operation A digital input configured as H1 0x 17 will look for the switch opening before initiating the Fast Stop operation Unlike a standard deceleration time once the Fast Stop operation is initiated even momentarily the Drive cannot be re operated until the deceleration is complete the Fast Stop input is cleared and the Run command is cycled Programming 5 38 1 Preset References B 01 01 Frequency Reference 1 d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 d1 03 F
58. CIMR 20 4 thru 2018 25 HP 208 V and 40P4 thru 4018 30 HP 480 V If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure as it is in Bypass units the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure See Removing and Replacing the Drive in this chapter IMPORTANT A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive If the Drive 1s installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive heatsink the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel B Removing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan 2 Pressinon the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 17 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 3 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector See Figure 7 4 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan Power Connector L 1 Fig 7 4 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure B installing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Drive 2 Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the D
59. Continued Parameter Parameter Name DascHphioh Setting Factory Menu No LCD Digital Operator Display Setting Location Ee Analog Outputs a Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and AC 1 Frequency Ref 100 max output frequency 2 Output Freq 100 max output frequency 3 Output Current 100 drive rated current 6 Output Voltage 100 230V or 100 460V 7 DC Bus Voltage 100 400V or 100 800V 8 Output k Watts 100 drive rated power 15 Term A1 Level 16 Term A2 Level Terminal FM Monitor Selection 18 Mot SEC Current 100 Motor rated secondary H4 01 Terminal FM Sel current 1 to 53 Programming 20 SFS Output 100 max output frequency 24 PI Feedback 31 Not Used 36 PI Input 37 PI Output 100 max output frequency 38 PI Setpoint 51 Auto Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 52 Hand Mode Fref 100 max output frequency 53 PI Feedback 2 NOTE 100 10V DC output FM gain setting 4 02 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 0 0 to 100 Terminal FM Gain when selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 iu Terminal FM Bias Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10V 110 0 to 0 0 Donum Terminal FM Bias when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 ee Selects which monitor will be output on terminals and AC 1 Frequency Ref 100 max
60. Determines parameter values after a drive initialization A1 03 is executed This should always be set to 1 American Spec 1 American spec 2 European spec 4 PV A spec 5 PV E spec 6 Chinese spec Parameters A 24 Setting Range 0 to 11 Oor 1 Oor 1 0 to 2 0 to FF Oorl Oor 1 0 to 65535 Factory Setting kVA Dependent 1 Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Parameter 02 10 02 12 02 14 BRE l o 02 15 LCD Digital Operator Display Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time Fan ON Time Set Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 Fault Trace Fault History Clear monitors Function 0 Disabled no effect FLT Trace Init 1 Enabled resets U2 and U3 monitors and returns 02 12 to zero kWh User Monitor U1 29 om Initialization kWh MonitorClear Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Description Used to reset the kilowatt Hour monitor to zero 0 Disabled no change 1 Clear all Resets U1 29 to zero and returns 02 14 to Zero Enables or disables the Hand key on the digital Hand Key Function Selection operator Oper Hand Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Setting Factory Range Setting Menu Location Programming Progra
61. DriveWizard will ask you to fill in parameters T1 02 Mtr Rated Power and T1 04 Rated Current After this data has been entered click on the Load button to enter these values into the Drive memory The Start button will become available click on Start to begin the auto tuning process While Auto Tuning is running the Drive output current and frequency will be displayed the flashing green light indicates DriveWizard is communicating with the Drive When complete DriveWizard will have auto tuned the Drive adjusted several motor related parameters and the Drive will be ready for optimum performance for bi directional Speed Search and other functions Programming 5 80 Chapter 6 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive and Bypass Bypass and H O A Control Panel Diagnostics 2 E 2 PoC ANON ND E 2 Set Up for Maintenance 2 eS TENG E 3 Drive DIAGNOSUCS srusen 6 Fault 7 Alarm Detector 13 Operator Programming Errors OPE 16 Auto Tunling s etait intu eb tuta ecd Sepa es aaa 17 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults 18 Drive Troublesh
62. Drives with 480V input Circuit Breaker Type Inverse Time MCCB or Instantaneous Trip MCP Voltage Rating 600V Table E 1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC 208 Vac Input Input Output Fuse Circuit Breaker Amps Amps Selection Criteria Selection Criteria t Maximum Maximum CIMR E7U Continuous Continuous Time Delay Non Time Delay Rating Rating Fuse Rating A Fuse Rating A Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND ratings Peripheral Devices E 2 Table E 2 Recommended Fuse Circuit Breaker Ratings 480 Vac Input Fuse Circuit Breaker ORE Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Amps Amps Model Maximum Maximum CIMR E7U 1 En Maximum CB Continuous Continuous June eh Rating A male Fuse Rating Fuse Rating A 50 4 67 2 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND ratings Ces f gt f o Branch Circuit Overload Protection All models have built in UL evaluated motor overload protection Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single
63. Factory Defaults 208 0V 208V Models 230 0V 240V Models 460 0V 480V Models B E1 06 Base Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 60 0 Hz B E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 3 0 Hz B E1 08 Mid Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 18 0V 208V Models 18 0V 240V Models 33 6V 480V Models B E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 1 5 Hz B E1 10 Mid Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 10 8V 208V Models 10 8V 240V Models 16 8V 480V Models B E1 11 Mid Output Frequency B Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz settings above 120 0 Hz are currently not supported Factory Default 0 0 Hz B E1 12 Mid Output Voltage B E1 13 Base Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 0 0V 208V Models 0 0V 240V Models 0 0V 480V Models Programming 5 46 To set up a custom V f pattern program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1 04 through 1 13 Be sure that the following condition 15 true 1 09 1 07 EI 06 1 11 EI
64. If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command Input B The Speed Command is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function 15 used the output frequency can not be set within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable B The frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Freq Ref Upper Limit Maximum Output Frequency 1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 24 Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Before attempting any troubleshooting checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors wi
65. L8 02 and the Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection parameter is set for Alarm and Reduce L8 03 4 OH Alarm amp Reduce the L8 19 parameter sets the amount of speed decrease that will be applied to the Speed Command in order to lower the heatsink temperature The decrease in speed will lower the current being switched and conducted by the heat producing output transistors of the Drive Parameter L8 19 15 set in percentage of maximum frequency 1 04 Programming 5 70 01 Monitor Configuration 01 01 User Monitor Selection Setting Range 6 to 53 Factory Default 6 Output Volage Gator PI Feedback 2 Value Programming 5 71 01 02 Power On Monitor Seating Frequency Reference factory default Output Frequency User Monitor set by 01 01 When the Drive is powered up the display monitor is the Power On monitor The factory default Power On monitor 1s Speed Command U1 01 Pressing the INCREASE key once scrolls the monitors to show the next two sequential monitors Output Frequency U1 02 Output Current 171 03 and User Monitor as selected by 01 01 The factory default for 01 01 is the Output Voltage monitor U1 06 The active monitor displayed when the Drive is powered on can be changed to either be U1 01 Speed Command U1 02 Output Frequency U1 03 Output Current or the User Monitor For example if the Drive needs to display the
66. PC s RS 232 port with a DB 9 to CAT 5 adaptor to the digital operator keypad port on the Drive Before disconnecting the digital operator keypad from the Drive set parameter 02 06 Oper Detection to O disabled This will allow the Drive to continue running with the digital operator keypad removed Start DriveWizard and setup the PC communications by setting the appropriate communications port and Baud rate Typical settings Com Port 1 and 9600 Baud Once the communications port 15 set connect to the Drive by clicking on the pull down menu Inverter and selecting Connect This can also be done by typing Ctrl C on your keyboard or by clicking on the yellow icon resembling two puzzle pieces This will upload all of the current parameters in the Drive to the computer as a working parameter file At this point the parameters can be saved as a backup file if desired DriveWizard is a third method of saving the complete parameter list and user settings In addition to the User Parameters 02 03 and Keypad Copy 03 01 functions discussed in this chapter DriveWizard can be employed to maintain a downloadable list of the Drive parameter set up on a PC for backup or transfer to other drives Auto Tuning is performed by selecting the Auto Tuning function from the Inverter pull down menu DriveWizard will ask you to verify that the motor is in a safe operating condition and then ask you to enter two parameters
67. PI Setpoint Display Scaling value 65 20 is a scaling factor that is applied to the monitor display for both the PI Setpoint U1 38 and the PI Feedback U1 24 Table 5 7 Setpoint Display Scaling Options If b5 20 is Jus and U1 38 Display Increments 1 0 00 0 2 through 39 RP enter the of motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units Programming 5 33 If the monitors seem more natural in terms of percentage set b5 20 1 If the monitors are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous RPM set b5 20 the number of motor poles If another engineered unit such fpm or cfm is desired set b5 20 xxxxx where Digit5 Digit4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100 speed Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places If 010105 0 number formatis XXXX If 010105 1 number formatis XXX X IfDigit5 2 number formatis XX XX IfDigit5 3 number formatis X XXX For example If b5 20 10425 then at 100 output the digital operator would display 42 5 for monitor U1 38 or U1 24 B b5 21 Sleep Source Seting SFS Input Output of PI block Snooze PI Setpoint factory default Pf Snooze 0 0 9 02 Parameter b5 21 selects the sleep function characteristic action When b5 21 0 SFS Input the sleep function start level b5 15 1s compared to the Drive s output Speed Command after PI block This is the setting t
68. RES X register Lower FAH Free ER CRC 16 Fig D 6 Function Code 03H Message Example B Write In Single Holding Register 06H Command Message Slave Address 1 Address Lm D toner nT Ue WW Response Message During Error Slave Address 01H 80H Function Code 86H Upper 82H Response Message During Normal Operation Slave Address Register Upper 00H MM De pm Setting Fuss ow Fig D 7 Function Code 06H Message Example Communications D 8 B Loopback Test 08H The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave Set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave address Slave address Higher Test Code Command Message Slave address Function code Fig D 8 Function Code 08H Message Example B Write In Several Holding Registers 10H Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage register address order The following table shows an example of a message when a
69. RPM Enter the number of motor poles 40 to 39999 User display Desired set display value is set at Max output frequency A 4 digit number The number of digits from the right the decimal point is displayed 0 to 39999 Programming Example If 200 0 is displayed at Max output frequency set 12000 When 01 03240 user units the unit selected in 01 09 will be displayed for D1 01 to D1 17 U1 01 U1 02 and U1 20 Set Value Description LCD display becomes dark Programming Standard setting LCD display becomes light c Factory setting changes to 2 when b5 01 1 01 06 01 07 01 08 User Monitor Selection Mode Monitor Mode Sel Second Line User Monitor Selection 2nd Monitor Sel Third Line User Monitor Selection 3rd Monitor Sel Selects the U1 monitors displayed on the 4th and 5th lines of the digital operator display 0 3 Mon Sequential Displays the next 2 sequential U1 monitors 1 3 Mon Selectable Displays U1 monitors set by 01 07 and o1 08 Sets the U1 monitor always displayed on the 4th line of the digital operator display Effective only when 01 06 1 0 or 1 0 Programming 1 to 53 a Programming Sets the U1 monitor always displayed on the 5th line of the digital operator display Effective only when 01 06 1 1 to 53 on Programming Parameters 23 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Par
70. See Table 5 2 PememyBa Bri Feedback D BemewyBisl The Drive A2 analog input E7N Terminal TB3 3 or TB5 9 can be programmed to perform many different functions The setting of parameter H3 09 determines which of the following functions the A2 analog input will perform Function Aux Reference Setting 2 In order for the A2 analog input to be used as the master Speed Command parameter H3 09 must be set for Aux Reference H3 09 2 Aux Reference Once A2 is configured as an auxiliary reference it can be selected as the master Speed Command by setting H3 13 1 Main TA2 If H3 09 2 terminal A2 analog input will become the speed command when a digital input programmed for Multi Step Ref 1 1 0 3 1s selected by a contact closure Function PI Feedback Setting B Configuring the A2 analog input as PI Feedback H3 09 PI Feedback is a requirement of setting the Drive up for PI operation The A2 analog input is the only source for feedback for PI operation though the setpoint can come from a number of different sources refer to the section covering the PI parameters for more information regarding specifying the setpoint source PI parameters are listed in section b5 Parameters H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain and H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias can be used to configure the A2 analog input to match the signal from the Feedback Transmitter The U1 24 monitor PI Feedback can be used to check
71. Sel B PI Feedback 0 to IF 273 Programming D Frequency Bias 2 0 100 bias E Motor Temperature See parameters L1 03 amp L1 04 16 PI Differential 1F Not Used H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal A2 Gain 10V input in 1000 0 uiis 5 5 H3 11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a 100 0 to 0 09 Terminal 2 Bias OV input in 100 0 5 5 Parameter Parameter Name Descipt h Setting Factory Menu No LCD Digital Operator Display P Range Setting Location Table A 1 Parameter List Continued 3 12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Used to smooth out erratic or noisy analog input 0 00 to 0 30sec Programming Filter Avg Time signals 2 00 Determines which terminal will be the main reference source 0 Main Fref TA1 Terminal TA1 is the main speed Master Frequency Reference command and Terminal TA2 is the Aux speed H3 13 Terminal Selection command 0 or Programming TA1 A2 Select 1 Main Fref TA2 Terminal TA2 is the main speed command and Terminal is the Aux speed command Only effective when H3 09 is set to 2 Aux Reference Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Factory setting changes to when b5 01 1 Parameters A 16 Table 1 Parameter List
72. Selections Programming Instructions for Individual Drive Parameters The discussions of individual Drive parameters in Chapter 5 are descriptive of the basic E7N unit without any options that would effect the programming of the E7 Drive Programming for Various Configuration and Options Tables 5 1 and 5 2 and the section titled Discussion of Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings provide details of the unique programming required for the E7N Bypass applications of the Drive with various configurations of options and sources for the control signals Tables 5 3 and 5 4 are similar but add PI control to the configuration possibilities Virtual Terminals The Drive multi function digital inputs and Drive analog inputs have for the most part become virtual terminals in the E7N two contactor Bypass design The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit is interconnected via ribbon cable with the Drive multi function digital inputs and Drive analog inputs to allow a single set of customer interface terminals to control both the Drive and Bypass circuits The Drive firmware however refers to these Drive terminals in order to program the functions of these inputs The E7N programming documentation and this manual then need to refer to these virtual terminals in Chapter 5 programming and Appendix A parameters These virtual terminals are called out for example in Table 5 1 Bypass Parameter Settings Drive t
73. Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter and then lowering the setting of n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain B Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control If there 1s oscillation or hunting during PI control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters Disable integral I control Reduce the proportional gain P until hunting stops Reintroduce the integral function starting with long integral time values to eliminate the P offset Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 23 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Drive 15 stopped the DC injection braking may be insufficient If the motor continues operating at low speed without completely stopping after a stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating the motor enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows ncrease the parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting ncrease the parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started or Stalls Generation of 0 V main circuit voltage and stalling can occur if a motor is turning when it is started and the DC injection braking is insufficient This can be prevented by slowing motor rotation by DC injection braking before starting Increase parameter b2 03 DC injection braking time at start setting
74. a properly wired and functioning Bypass control PCB Before any testing verify that all three LEDs on the card are lit brightly if not re check the fuses on the PCB and security of connections D1 DRV_OK monitors the Drive connection and power status D56 VKP OK monitors the keypad connection and power status D61 VCC monitors the control PCB power status After the 2 second initial period LEDs on the keypad go off and start to cycle sequentially with approximately a 2 second interval Also the control A2 relays to K10 along with all the Drive command outputs to Drive terminals S1 S2 54 and S5 will start cycling concurrently with the keypad LEDs Both the Motor Overload Relay CN109 5 input and Safety Interlock input TB1 1 must be activated This is done as a safety precaution for the connected power systems Verify that to K10 are cycling by monitoring the connected devices such as contactors cabinet blowers and any customer wired outputs Cycling of the Drive input commands to Drive terminals S1 S3 S5 can be verified through the Drive keypad by monitoring 01 10 The first and third to fifth digits should cycle with half the speed of the bypass keypad LEDs Test the H O A keypad itself for properly functioning of LEDs and switches To test the LEDs either all the LEDs should light up for 2 seconds at power up or during the cyclic rotation each of them should light up sequentially To test the switches press any k
75. and TM E7B 01 Table 2 12 Serial Communications Terminal Designation Cross Reference 5485 Terminal E7 Drive RS485 Terminal ______ ____ _____ LLL S efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 15 B Terminating Resistor The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain Set the terminating resistance by turning ON DIP switch 81 1 PCB A2 1 Drive TB4 1 5 RS 422A D or RS 485 R4 TB4 3 4 4 Terminating resistance 1 2W 110 Ohms Fig 2 7 Terminating Resistor 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication wiring and use proper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communication connect TB4 1 to TB4 3 and TB4 2 to TB4 4 on the control circuit terminal board See Fig 2 8 below 4 Connect shield at one end only TB4 on Control PCB A2 TB4 3 TB4 4 4 1 184 2 Fig 2 8 5 485 Communication Connection Electrical Installation 2 16 Remote Transfer to Bypass Terminal 1 4 on the Control PCB A2 is a dedicated terminal for Remote Transfer to Bypass operation This function allows a contact closure from a BAS between terminals 1 4 and 1 9 to transfer motor operation from Drive mode to Bypass mode This remote transfer to Bypass function overrides the Drive Select manual butt
76. applied to the drive system start Up and Operation 4 3 BYPASS UNIT START UP PREPARATION Note These instructions assume that all jumpers and DIP switches are in the factory default position as defined by schematic diagram DS E7N 01 O 1 Review this Bypass Technical Manual and any option instructions and schematics shipped with the Drive and Bypass unit Verify that the model numbers and voltage ratings are as specified in the purchase order by matching the nameplate data for each unit to the purchase order Verify that the unit has been installed in accordance with Chapter 1 Receiving and Mechanical Installation and Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Inspect the security of the supply line power ground connections and all control circuit connections as identified in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Double check all the power wires and motor wires Verify that the electrical supply power lines L1 L2 L3 are connected to the input disconnect switch S1 on the wir ing diagram in Chapter 2 and that the motor leads T1 T2 T3 are connected to the output terminals of the overload relay S10 on the wiring diagram in Chapter 2 Ensure that all connections are tight loose wire connections may cause intermittent problems or overheating Factory connections sometimes come loose during shipment Review the installer s as wired schematic Determine if a driven motor safety circuit is connected This is a series
77. as follows Table 5 13 Option Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source OPEN From Serial Com port R R 5 and S embedded protocols CLOSED From the control circuit and analog input terminals IMPORTANT Switching the Reference and Run sources can only be done while the Drive is stopped Programming 5 52 H2 Digital Outputs B 2 01 Drive Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection H2 02 Drive Terminal M3 M4 Function Selection Setting Range 0 to 3B Factory Default H2 01 0 During Run 1 H2 02 3B Run Src Com Opt H2 01 and H2 02 are two of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 The Drive has two multi function outputs By programming parameters H2 01 and H2 02 the user can assign specific functions to each output Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital output functions Refer to the Programming Manual for a more detailed description of each of the functions Table 5 14 Digital Output Functions Parameter Parameter Function Function setting Setting During Run Terminal Not Used memi e Programming 5 53 H3 Analog Inputs B 3 02 Drive Terminal 1 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 The addition of another input signal on terminal 1 to the Drive and Bypass unit after shipment to the job site would be the only reason for changing t
78. be padlocked the OFF position This disconnect switch DOES NOT provide branch short circuit protection A device to provide branch short circuit protection MUST be provided by others upstream of the E7N Bypass unit 1 DTI Aa SANGER Fig 1 6 Disconnect Handle Positions Shown OFF With Padlock efesotomasyon com Physical Installation 1 10 Internal Bypass Panel Control Wiring Terminal Strips TB1 TBS Control Power Transformer Option Load Connections Bypass Contactor Overload verload Relay Output Contactor Circuit Breaker Line Connections Disconnect Fig 1 7 Internal Bypass Panel 4 TB5 and Terminal PE e o Jumpers J2 and J3 TB1 TB2 and TB3 c Analog Output Signal Level n wm gt DIP Switches 51 52 S3 54 for Field Configuration of Drive Bypass Operation Jumper J1 Digital Input Voltage Source Selection Hinged Enclosure Door Fig 1 8 PCB A2 Control Logic and Connections Physical Installation 1 11 B Contactors The Bypass is a 2 contactor or 3 contactor Bypass circuit employing IEC rated contactors in an electrically interlocked arrangement to allow mutually exclusive operation in Drive or Bypass modes The control logic and soft start characteristic of the Drive limit the Drive input and output contactors to mo
79. devices using the Modbus protocol Modbus Communication Configuration Modbus communication is configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time Consequently the slave address of each slave must be initially set so that the master can perform serial communication using that address Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions and send a response back to the master Master Fig D 1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive Communication Specifications The Modbus communication specifications are shown below tem Communications Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps EM Datalength 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits bit selected Number of Connectable Units 3 units max Communications D 3 Communication Connection Terminal Modbus communication uses the following terminals 4 1 S 4 2 S 4 3 and 4 4 R The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch 51 S 51 et RS 422A A Terminating 2 2 or RS 485 A ON Y resist
80. display to indicate 3 variables for PI control as in Figure 5 14 when the HAND OFF AUTO selector is in AUTO Table 5 5 parameter for optional LCD display setup for PI control Table 5 5 Parameters for Optional LCD Display Setup for PI Control SETTING PARAMETER KEYPAD DISPLAY NUMBER For Bypass iid E For Bypass Setting 79 17 Digital Operator Display Selection Set Tor percent Display Sealing 038999 a for PI Control Non Selectable NE EE eee re Feedback Feedback MUTO SETPOINT Frequency Ref OUTPUT U1 02 54 98 U1 24 12 4 FEEDBACK 5585 ENTER STOPO Fig 5 14 Drive Display for PI Control AUTO Mode When the HAND OFF AUTO selector is transfered to the HAND position the display will automatically change to indicate the speed command as in Figure 5 15 FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM AUTO HAND DRIVE SPEED COMMAND Frequency Ref OUTPUT U1 02 40 U1 24 0 0 FEEDBACK Fig 5 15 Drive Display for Control HAND Mode Programming 5 26 B Discussion of Table 5 4 Options Dependent Control Bypass Parameter Settings Typical Drive Parameter Settings for PI Control with Various Combinations of Bypass and Control Options Notes For project specific PI control tuning see the PI Control b5 XX parameters in this chapter Tables 5 3 and 5 4 provide the basic configuration for PI Control from a Dri
81. fault the Drive 0 5 to 600 0 180 0sec Quick Setting Max Restart Time waits L5 03 seconds before attempting another restart Torque Detection a Determines the drive s response to an overtorque undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 02 and L6 03 0 Disabled 1 OL SpdAgree Alm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection OL At RUN Alm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection OL SpdAgree Flt Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut Torque Detection Selection 1 down on ai OLA faul L6 01 L OL At RUN Flt Overtorque Detection is always 0 to 8 Programming oad Detection i active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault LL SpdAgree Alm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection 6 LL at RUN Alm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection 7 LL SpdAgree Flt Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault 8 LL At RUN Flt Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault Torque Detection Level 1 Sets the overtorque undertorque detection level as a T EINE Load Det Lvl percentage of Drive rated current i me Progr
82. frequency voltage Carrier frequency data setting fault Carrier frequency proportional gain C6 05 gt 6 and 6 04 gt C6 03 Parameter setting incorrect Upper lower limit error of C6 03 to 5 0kHz Check the program settings and correct the errors OPE11 CarrFrq On Delay ERR Power supply is turned OFF Cycle power off and on to Drive EEPROM R W Err OM RIS IO Parameter is reset repeatedly Do a factory initialization A1 03 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 16 Auto Tuning Faults Auto tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to a stop during operation The fault contact is not activated Table 6 6 Auto Tuning Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Probable Cause Corrective Action There is an error in the data input for autotuning Check input data Er 01 Fault e There is an error in the relationship Check Drive and motor capacity between the motor output and the Check motor rated current motor rated current Check input data Er 02 A minor fault is detected during Check wirings and around the Minor Fault auto tuning machine Check the load Er 03 The STOP key is pressed during auto tuning and the auto tuning is STOP key interrupted Check input data Check motor wiring f a motor and a machine are connected disconnect the moto
83. inspection Check for physical damage 2 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 3 Ifthe resistor is damaged the measured value will be infinite ohms Soft Charge Resistor Check R1 R2 6PCB The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that each contact resistance measures infinite ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor press the plunger in and verify that each contact measures zero ohms On Drives without a board mounted contactor release the plunger and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that the contactor coil measures about 300 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the con tacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 230VAC contactor coil measures about 175 ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2 2M ohms The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states The DC bus fuse 15 located in the negative portion
84. of parameters in the Drive Follow the key operations below to access the Quick Setting Menu Example Operations Key operations in quick programming menu are shown in the following figure Menu Selection Display Quick Programming Menu DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Monitor Display Setting Display PT DATA Language Selection DATA_ ENTER 1 Reference selection DATA 21 FEE ITU 1 LI i NS 77 ENTE ENTER b1 04 Reverse Operation Selection C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 b4 01 Delay ON Timer C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 b5 XX PI Mode Parameters d2 01 Frequency Reference b8 01 Energy Savings Upper Limit Control Selection d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit User Parameter Default Value wo v 1 Read Allowed Selection DATA Fig 3 5 Operations in Quick Programming Menu Control Panel 3 16 E1 01 E2 01 F6 01 H3 02 H3 03 H3 10 H3 11 L2 01 L2 02 L4 05 L4 06 L5 01 L5 03 L6 01 L6 02 L6 03 L8 11 01 01 01 05 01 07 01 08 Input Voltage Setting Motor Rated Current Operation Selection After Communication Error Terminal A1 Gain Setting Terminal A1 Bias Setting Terminal A2 Gain Setting Terminal A2 Bias Setting Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selec
85. of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short If the DC bus fuse is open at least one of the output transistors has failed When a transistor fails there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors 1 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Soft Charge Contactor DC Bus Fuse F1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 26 Table 6 8 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Plac
86. on Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off Status indicator LEDs and Digital Operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below 50 VDC To prevent electric shock wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage The Drive and Bypass unit is not suitable for circuits capable of delivering more than the specified RMS symmetrical amperes Install adequate branch short circuit protection per applicable codes Refer to the specification Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and or personal injury Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user doing so will void the warranty This product must not be modified Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive and Bypass unit matches th
87. or Schematic diagram DS E7N 01 DIP switches S1 S2 S3 and S4 allow the user to configure various project specific functions of the E7N including Serial Communication terminating resistor Speed command source Analog input signal level Activate or inactivate functions Auto transfer to Bypass on Drive Fault Safety interlock circuit BAS interlock circuit Power up mode selection Function of 3 SPDT programmable output relays Annunciate Running in Bypass mode Damper actuator energized employed to energize damper actuator Annunciate Auto Transfer to Bypass Annunciate Running in Drive mode Annunciate Run command received from serial comm Annunciate Hand mode Annunciate Auto mode TB4 TB5 Annunciate Drive motor or control fault gt J2 and J3 AK Yir E 54 es aM TB3 DIP Switch Location on PCB A2 aes oe a S 182 42 n 8 i ls z 19 Ay i 1 cub SS Fig 1 9 Printed Circuit Board 2 DIP Switches for Drive Bypass Operational Configuration Physical Installation 1 13 a Br 2 ANE EET 1 4449 ate ca A ON A OFF DIP Switch 51 example Fig 1 10 DIP Switches S1 to S4 for Drive Bypass Operational Configuration Physical Installation 1 14 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLES
88. ordered To add PI control to a Bypass unit observe the control options that are included in the unit by review of the model number on the nameplate inside of door and external lower right side as well as the option codes and model number description in Chapter 1 Then revise the parameter settings indicated in Table 5 3 and 5 4 for a line of data in Table 5 4 with the same or similar combination of options and sources for the speed and run commands This will add the logic required for PI con trol to that required for Bypass control Table 5 3 includes parameters that are the same regardless of control options specified while Table 5 4 provides detail on the option dependent parameters Programming 5 23 Table 5 3 Control Parameter Settings E7N Bypass Units SETTING OPTIONAL LCD Bypass amp PI Bypass UNITS DESCRIPTION KEYPAD DISPLAY NUMBER For Bypass Setting NL i speed command input source 0 NA H1 03 SEE TABLE SEE TABLE N A Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection Set Terminal S5 Sel Com Inv Sel 2 H1 04 SEE TABLE 4 N A Drive Terminal S6 Function Selection Set H3 08 SEETABLE SEETABLE _ Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal Term A2 Signal 0 10 VDC 5 4 3 2 selection 0 to 10 VDC Drive control board switch S1 2 off or 4 to 20 mA Drive con PARAMETER trol board switch 51 2 on H3 09 SEE TABLE N A Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection Terminal A2 Sel PI Feedback 222 Se
89. output power connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the OverLoad Relay Bypass Contactor Output Contactor Overload Relay Drive Selector Switch Motor Connections Ground Lug Input Power Terminals Fig 2 1 Typical Input Power Connection Electrical Installation 2 2 Field Wiring Pressure Wire Connector Wire Range and Tightening Torque Specifications CUSTOMER WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR 100 AMPS USE A MINIMUM OF 60 757 COPPER WIRE FOR ABOVE 100 AMPS USE A MINIMUM OF 75 C COPPER WIRE TABLE 2 LINE WIRING OPTION C OPTION D STANDARD NON FUSED INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER MCP FUSED INPUT DISCONNECT SWITCH INPUT DISCONNECT SWITCH E7 BYPASS CURRENT WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING WIRE Td TIGHTENING MFG WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING NUMBER AMPS 1B NUMBER iB NUMBER iB eoori raeo _ IE x CFD30J3 0002 B002 s ad LE RR 8014 FAL36030 30 AL36030 CFD30J3 _____ 8021 FALS6030 Bud zL 0024 8027 T 1 0 DO3O 8034 FAL36050 50 _ 040 FAL36100 GS1JU3 14 2 0 8 mE D059 Fx 4 350 kcmil 250 0074 KAL36150 150 TABLE 3 A C MOTOR WIRING EARTH GND WIRING CONTROL WIRING a OVERLOAD RELAY _ TERMINAL BLOCKS 1 5 TIGHTENING WIRE SIZE TIGHTENING D003 BOOS LRD15 0004 004 0007 8007 0010 035 D059 Determine the w
90. power up Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 7 Corrective Action Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Digital Operator Display CPF04 Internal A D Err CPF05 External A D Err CPF07 RAM Err WAT Err CPFO9 CPU Err CPF10 ASIC Err CPF20 Option A D Error CPF21 Option CPU Down CPF22 Option Type Err Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Noise or spike on the control CPU Internal A D Converter Fault MEE circuit input terminals Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals un Control circuit damage Control circuit damage CPU External A D Converter Fault Control circuit damage CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault oom m Control circuit damage ASIC Version Fault ASIC Control circuit damage Option card connector connection fault Op
91. reference speed command setting location Frequency Ref when in hand mode Units changeable via 01 03 Output Frequency Output frequency speed monitor Units changeable via U1 02 Output Freq ol 03 Output Current 25 Output Voltage 01 06 Output Voltage Displays Drive output voltage Parameters A 25 Monitor List Table A 2 Monitor List Continued Parameter pale Description No LCD Digital Operator Display DC Bus Voltage 01 07 DC Bus Voltage Displays DC Bus Voltage Output Power U1 08 Output kWatts Displays Drive output power Displays Drive input terminal status 00000000 FWD run Terminal 51 is ON REV run Terminal 52 is ON 1 Multi function input 1 Terminal 53 is ON 1 Multi function input 2 Terminal 54 is ON 1 Multi function input 3 Terminal 55 is ON 1 Multi function input 4 Terminal S6 is ON 1 Multi function input 5 Terminal 57 is ON Input Terminal Status Input Term Sts UI 10 Output terminal ON OFF Check 0 0 0 E 1 Multi function Contact 1 output 1 Terminal 1 2 is ON 1 Multi function Contact 2 Output Terminal Status output 1 Terminal M3 M4 Output Term Sts is ON Not used UI 11 1 Fault output Terminal MA MB is ON During running 1 During zero speed During reverse
92. restart Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5 01 1F Overload OL1 Closes before a motor overload occurs 90 of time 20 OH Prealarm Closes when the Drive s heatsink temperature exceeds the setting of parameter L8 02 38 Drive Enable Closes when the drive enable input is active 39 Waiting to Run Closes during the time after a run command is issued but the Drive is not running due to the time set in parameter 61 10 3A OH Freq Reduce 3B Run Src Com Opt 3D Cooling Fan Err Closed during internal cooling fan failure Parameters A 15 Menu Location Setting Factory Range Setting 0 to 3B Programming 0 to 3B Programming Analog Inputs C H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Sets the speed command when 10V is input as a 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal Al Gain percentage of the maximum output frequency 1 04 1000 0 SOR 5 H3 03 Terminal 1 Bias Setting Sets the speed command when OV is input as a 100 0 to 0 09 Terminal 1 Bias percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 100 0 Terminal 2 Signal Level Selects the signal level of terminal A2 H3 08 Selection 0 0 1OVDC switch 5 1 2 must be in the off position 0 or 2 Programming Term A2 Signal 2 4 20 mA switch 51 2 must be in the on position Selects what effect the Aux terminal A2 has on the drive 0 Frequency Bias 0 100 bias Aux Terminal Function Selection H3 09 Terminal A2
93. supply to the Drive again MA M4 M1 E G Fig D 10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self Diagnosis Function During normal self diagnostic operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE Modbus communication error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output will be turned ON and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF Communications D 15 Metasys 2 Point Database Metasys N2 Analog Input Al Summary Table 0 9 2 Analog Input Summary E7 to Metasys 2 Objectib 7 AIS PAUL CODE Al 11 ELAPSED TIME HOURS AID AT ATG AU Ar EAST FAULT CODE ATI AI AS NIS INPUTTERMSTATUS FAUT AIT OPERATIONSTATUSQ FAULT ALS AI MOSTRECENTFAUT o S AT AT36 NEL NIS READPARAMETERDATA Communications D 16 Parameter 1 01 01 02 01 03 01 08 01 24 01 06 01 07 02 01 01 13 01 13 01 30 9 01 1 39 1 36 01 37 1 38 02 02 02 03 02 04 02 05 02 07 02 08 02 09 02 11 02 12 02 13 02 14 3 01 3 02 3 03 3 04 3 05 3 06 3 07 3 08 5 lt Ui N gt 5 S gt 9 o C
94. to the Drive Remove the power factor correc tion capacitors OVRD Emergcy Override PRHT Motor Preheating Motor Preheating Motor is preheating Check the input circuit and Emergency Override Forward or Reverse Emergency Emergency Override is active Override input is closed T L3 dem UV DC Bus Undervoltage within specifications DC Bus Undervolt The acceleration time is set too T Flashing 208 240VAC Trip point is 190Vdc ort Extend the time in C1 01 480VAC Trip point is lt 380Vdc Voltage fluctuation of the input power 15 too large Cycle power off and on to the Drive UV2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage of the External load connected pulling CTL PS Undervolt control circuit when running down the Drive power supplies Re pair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Cycle power off and on to the Contacts on the soft charge Drive Soft Charge Circuit Fault UV3 i contactor are dirty and the soft MC Answerback The pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor does not Drive was running function mechanically Check the condition of the soft charge contactor Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 15 Operator Programming Errors OPE An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting
95. 01 OUTPUT K2 KS CONTACTOR 117 114 gum 2 1 7 115100 Pus ale C ILI 2 A1 0 25A 250VAC 100 Mc 111 e 5 L1 1 39 1 FACTORY SETTING 112 L2 1 39 B PROGRAMMABLE PART NUMBER RELAY 1 FACTORY SETTING 9 000270 5 CN110 MODE T LN is LJ WY HAND OFF AUTO FERRITE CORE ME CA FACTORY SETTING CN102 IS AUTO MODE TO DRIVE CONTROL PCB CONNECTOR CN8 X ISOLATED 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC AUTO MODE REFERENCE INPUT DRIVE FM MONITOR OUTPUT 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC E SELECTED BY JUMPER J2 FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC OPTIONS OR V RIAL COMMUNICATIONS SEE THE APPROPRIATE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 3 FACTORY SETTING IS SYSTEM FAULT AS SELECTED BY IP SWITCH 3 amp 4 LE 4 Bi 5 2 s 2 el 9 s SEE SH 3 TA FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC CONNECTED TO DRIVE DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 2 A2 TERMINAL SP DRIVE TERMINAL m e d NOT USED CN103 DRIVE SHIELD TERMINAL 57 INPUT TB3 4 TB5 6 DRIE SH 2 TERMINAL 56 INPUT DRIVE AM MONITOR OUPUT 4 20MADC OR 0 10 0 AS SELECTED BY JUMPER J3 FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC AC V 15VDC 20mA A2 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC AS SELECTED BY DIP SW 512 FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC e fe e CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY
96. 04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B 1 for the Drive model number After properly setting parameter 02 04 a 2 wire or 3 wire initialization must be performed by setting parameter 1 03 2220 or 1 03 3330 respectively This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B 2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating Table B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Voltage Model Number 02 04 Setting Nominal Hp 208 VAC 1 CIMR E7U27P5 CIMR E7U20111 CIMR E7U20151 CIMR E7U20181 cmmeEmas 1 2 3 4 5 7 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 28 29 2 2 2 Capacity Related Parameters 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 The factory setting of the following parameters may change when the Drive capacity 15 changed Table B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 Parameter Number Digital Operator Display b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF C 6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection CarrierFreq Sel E2 01 Motor Rated Current Motor Rated FLA E2 03 Motor No Load Current No Load Current E2 05 Motor ee Resistance Term Resistance 12 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Rampt L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level OH Pre Alarm Lvl L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Ph Los
97. 1 B b3 02 Speed Search Deactivation Current Setting Range 0 to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current When using the current detection method of Speed Search parameter b3 02 sets the current level that will determine when the search is complete and the rotor and output speeds match When the output frequency is higher than the actual rotor speed the slip causes the current to be high As the output frequency is lowered the closer it comes to the rotor speed the lower the rent draw will be When the output current drops below the level as set b3 02 100 Drive Rated Current the output frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes B 63 03 Speed Search Deceleration Time Setting Range 0 1 to 10 0 Seconds Factory Default 2 0 Seconds Parameter b3 03 sets the deceleration ramp used by the current detection method of Speed Search when searching for the motor s rotor speed Even if Speed Search 2 is selected for Speed Search at start the time entered into b3 03 will be the time to decelerate from maximum frequency E1 04 to minimum frequency 1 09 B 63 05 Speed Search Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Seconds Factory Default 0 2 Seconds In cases where an output contactor is used between the Drive and the motor extra waiting time is provided after power returns and before Speed Search is performed This extra time allows for the contactor to operate When S
98. 1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal Al input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1 02 keypad as a preset speed This input contact is closed when H O A Hand Programming 5 7 B Options P Pneumatic Pressure Transducer Bypass with pneumatic input for speed control Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer or 4 20 mA applied to Terminal TB5 9 Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Transducer output is 4 20 mA Note Control DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure sele
99. 1 specifies from where the speed command 15 received when the Drive is in the AUTO mode Switching into the AUTO mode can be done by pressing the AUTO key of the Hand Off Auto selector If a Run command is input to the Drive but no corresponding speed command is input the Run indicator on IMPORTANT x 2242 uh the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink Programming 5 12 If you want the Drive to follow the speed command set by the digital operator Use the HAND mode by pressing the HAND key of the HAND OFF AUTO selector The speed command can then be entered into the U1 01 monitor parameter in the DRIVE Menu If you want the Drive to follow an AUTO analog speed command Connect a 0 10 VDC 4 20 mA speed command signal to terminals TB3 3 positive and TB3 1 common Select the AUTO position of the Hand Off Auto selector If you want the Drive to receive the speed command from serial communication Set the parameters indicated Table 5 2 for the desired serial communication option Connect the RS 485 422 serial communications cable to terminals TB4 3 R TB4 4 R TB4 1 S and TB4 2 S on the E7N PCB A2 The HAND OFF AUTO selector must be in the AUTO position B b1 02 Run Source Seins Om Terminals factory default Option PCB To successfully operate the Drive or Bypass and motor remotely an external run command must be received by the
100. 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 10096 speed Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places in the displayed number IfDigit 5 0 number formatis XXXX IfDigit5 1 number formatis XXX X IfDigit5 2 number formatis XX XX IfDigit5 3 number formatis X XXX For example If 01 03 10425 then at full speed the digital operator will display 42 5 Configuring parameter 01 03 for displaying in terms of an engineering unit is only appropriate if the actual display units have a linear relationship with the actual output speed Programming 5 73 B 01 05 LCD Contrast Adjustment Setting Range 0105 Factory Default 3 The contrast setting of the LCD display of the digital operator can be adjusted by the setting of parameter o1 05 The higher the number programmed into 01 05 the darker the background will become Set 01 05 to the value that makes the LCD the easiest to view at the normal viewing distance and angle B 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode Optional LCD Operator only OO W 3 Mon Sequential factory default 3 Mon Selectable E 01 07 Second Line User Monitor Optional LCD Operator only Setting Range 1 to 53 Factory Default 2 B 01 08 Third Line User Monitor Optional LCD Operator only Setting Range 1 to 53 Factory Default 3 Normally the monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential monitors If 01 06 User Monitor Selection Mode is set to 1
101. 2 Have all wire clippings screws other foreign material been removed from the Drive and Bypass enclosure 3 Are all terminal screws tight Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits 1 Separate control wiring from power motor wiring and other high power lines 2 Separate wiring for control circuit terminals for digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals 3 Ifusing an optional external power supply it should be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source 4 Usetwisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Prepare cable ends as shown in Figure 2 10 Connect the shield wire to terminal PE 6 Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Shield sheath Insulation Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath terminal PE 2 Fig 2 10 Preparing the Termination of Shielded Twisted Pair Cables Electrical Installation 2 20 Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 15 Table 2 15 Bypass Control Circuit Terminals Signal Name Signal Level 1 1 a NC Safety Circuit Fault when OPEN 1 2 TBI O Auto Mode run stop command Run when CLOSED stopped when OPEN TB1 3 EG BAS Interlock Enable Drive when Closed Digital 1 4 LY input iss Remote
102. 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Allowable voltage fluctuation t 10 15 Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 Measures for power supply harmonics Un o D 0 oO o e s o gt 5 3 oO z 12 Pulse Rectification Not possible Possible Control characteristics Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Bypass and Drive s rated output current is equal to or greater than the motor s rated current A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Specifications C 3 All Voltages All Models un o nN oO Iss Protective Functions Control method Speed range Speed control accuracy Frequency accuracy temperature characteristics Frequency setting resolution Frequency setting signal Speed Command Acceleration Deceleration time Main Drive control functions Main Bypass control functions Motor protection Fuse blown protection Overload capacity and maximum current Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Momentary power loss ride thru Cooling fin overheating Stall prevention Grounding protection Charge indicator Enclosure Type Environment Ambient operating tempera
103. 5 14 b5 15 b5 16 b5 17 b5 18 b5 19 b5 20 b5 21 b5 22 b5 23 b5 24 b5 25 b5 26 b5 27 PI Output Reverse Selection Output Rev Sel PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Fb los Det Sel PI Feedback Loss Detection Level Fb los Det Lvl PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Fb los Det Time Sleep Function Start Level Sleep Level PI Setpoint Selection PI Setpoint Sel PI Setpoint Value PI Setpoint PI Setpoint Display Scaling Setpoint Scaling PI Sleep Input Source PI Sleep Source PI Snooze Level Snooze Level PI Snooze Delay Time Snooze Delay Time PI Snooze Deactivation Level Wake Up Level PI Setpoint Boost Setting Setpoint Boost PI Maximum Boost Time Max Boost Time PI Snooze Feedback Level Snooze Feedback 0 Disabled 1 Alarm 2 Fault Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percentage of maximum frequency 1 04 Sets the PI feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds Sets the sleep function start frequency Depends on b5 20 Set display setting Unit of b5 19 U1 24 and U1 38 Input Source Selection for Sleep function Mode 0 PI Setpoint 1 SFS Input This is near the PI output 2 Snooze Sets the PI snooze function start level as a percentage of maximum frequency 1 04 Sets the PI snooze function delay time in terms of seconds When the PI feedback drops below this level normal PI operation starts agai
104. 60 Hz Raed inputen A 33 o y Ts Tv Ss oy Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Allowable frequency fluctuation DC Reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Rectification Not possible Note The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Bypass and Drive s rated output current is equal to or greater than the motor s rated current A phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Only 208V model numbers are shown cay a 3 Nn 2 5 e characteristics characteristics opecifications C 2 480 Table C 2 480 VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage po Rated voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 15 Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation 5 DC Reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics 12 pulse Not possible Rectification p Control characteristics Table 2 480 VAC Drive Specifications Continued Bypass Model Number E7L Motor HP 460V Bypass rated output current A 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Drivemax outputfrequeney H2 n aM
105. 7 8 and fuse F102 If external supply used check the voltage levels either 24VDC or all 120VAC 10 safe area no mixing Drive TB3 TBS I O not OK Test the Drive functions wiring only No motor run in Hand mode Check S4 3 to be off Maybe in Start Stop Option mode Runs the motor at power up Check S2 2 to be off Check TB1 2 and 52 1 us d Check 52 3 to be off Maybe in Maintenance mode Drive reads no analog signal Check 51 2 51 3 51 4 Check the Drive parameters see Table 5 2 Any or all the user digital I O at TB1 are not accepted Very noisy area or unstable power If long wiring 15 present from customer side try setting J1 to position 2 3 and supply control power externally Add RC filters to TB1 1 through 6 and or use shielded cables Recycle the power Powers up to Off mode Check 52 2 to be and 54 4 to be off All LEDs always lit Check keypad wiring Bad board and or voltage Off mode locked and Auto or Hand mode not If Power LED blinks check keypad wiring and recycle the power Replace the working H O A keypad and or its cable D56 OR EED is oft keypad de dead n the keypad cable and wiring Replace the H O A keypad and or its e Dave Check 52 1 to be ON Check the Drive and its wiring fault is reset Control Power LED blinks and motor cannot run Shuts down the Drive and or the motor by itself and does not run anymore Bad keypad or unstab
106. 9 0 0 to 200 0 1 5Hz Programming To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for 0 to 255 0 Mid Output Voltage 2 a 09 this case the setting for 1 08 will be 240V Min Voltage Vidi im 0 to 510 0 Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following 480V manner 1 04 FMAX gt 1 06 FA gt 1 07 FB gt 1 09 FMIN Mid Output Frequency Mid Frequency B 0 to 255 0 Mid Output Voltage B 240V Mid Voltage B Set only when V f is finely adjusted at rated output range 0 to 510 0 Adjustment is not normally required 480V 0 to 255 0 Base Voltage 240V Base Voltage 0 to 510 0 480V E1 10 10 8VAC Programming 1 11 0 082 Programming E1 12 0 0VAC Programming 1 13 0 0VAC Programming Parameters A 10 Parameter No 2 01 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Motor Rated Current Motor Rated FLA Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Setting Motor Setup Set to the motor nameplate full load amps 10 to 200 Factory Setting kVA Dependent Menu Location Quick Setting kVA kVA E2 03 No Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of the motor 0 000 to kVA 65 000 Dependent EE Com OPT Setup 2 05 F6 01 F6 02 F6 03 F6 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance Term Resistance Operation Selection after Communication Error Comm Bus FIt Sel Detection Selectio
107. A1 03 0 No Change No user parameter set active 1 Set Defaults Saves current parameter settings as user initialization 1 03 now allows selecting lt 1110 gt for user initialization 2 Clear All Clears the currently saved user initialization 1 03 no longer allows selecting lt 1110 gt Sets the kVA of the drive Enter the number based on drive Model Use the OOOO portion of the CIMR ET7LILILIL Model Number Reference Appendix B Determines if the Data Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator 0 Disabled Data Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference 1 Enabled Data Enter key is not required The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the digital operator without having to press the data enter key Determines if the drive will stop when the digital operator is removed 0 Disabled The drive will not stop when the digital operator is removed 1 Enabled The drive will fault OPR and coast to stop when the operator is removed Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Factory settings change when b5 01 1 as follows 01 06 1 01 07 38 01 08 24 Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed timer 02 07 0 Power On Time Time accumulates whenever drive is powered 1 Running Time Time accumulates only when drive is running
108. AL COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATING RESISTANCE SEE TABLE 5 2 DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 2 A2 SIGNAL H3 08 0 FOR 0 10VDC 4 20MADC 0 10VDC YES oN F TB3 3 CONNECTED TO DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 2 A2 we YES 1 YES 3 INACTIVE OFF 46 SEETABLE26 ooo 7 6 SEETABLE26 SEE TABLE 5 2 INACTIVE SPEED COMMAND FROM DRIVE TERMINAL 2 WITHSERIALCOMM YES NO EX Auto Transfer to Bypass When enabled DIP switch S2 1 ON the Bypass unit will automatically switch into Bypass mode on a Drive fault After clearing the Drive fault condition the function resets by moving the disconnect switch to the OFF position and waiting for the keypad to go blank CAUTION Before selecting this function in fan applications care must be taken to ensure that the ductwork is designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at minimum position or closed The factory default for this function is disabled E Power Up Mode The Drive Bypass electronic interface can be configured via a DIP switch to be in the AUTO mode or OFF when power is applied to the unit This function is controlled by DIP switch 52 2 ON for AUTO operation on power up The factory default is to power up to the OFF mode Electrical Installation 2 18 Bypass Controller PCB Customer Provided Control Circuit Inputs gt INTERNAL SUPPLY 120 VAC LOGIC ELECTRONIC BYPAS
109. Application 2721 Logical Digital Output LDO Summary to E7 Point ida Off 0 On 1 Pcaprevsror 1 DAY NGT MF INP 1 MEF INP 2 m MF INP 4 MF INP 5 DISABLE ENABLE H5 05 po NEN Co La 35 ER E MF INP 3 EE UN WE E ME CEN HE Communications D 25 Mailbox Function Points B Reading a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter 70 Specifies the parameter to be read from 71 Reports the value of the parameter specified in Point 70 When this point is read it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller Example Entering a value of 387 183 hex in Point 70 specifies Drive parameter B1 04 Reading Point 71 returns the cur rent setting of parameter B1 04 to the controller Writing to a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter 72 Specifies the parameter to be written to 73 Entry location of the value to be written to the parameter specified Point 72 When this point is written to it will write the value to the Drive An enter or accept command does not need to be sent for the data to be taken by the Drive The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator If the Drive is running there are a limited number of Drive parameters that can be written to Example Entering a value of 387 183 hex in Point 72 specifies Drive para
110. C Terminal AM Signal Level 2 4 20 mA Selection An analog output of 4 20 mA can not be used with 0 or 2 AO Level Select2 the standard terminal board Therefore an optional terminal board with shunt connector CN15 is needed Serial Com Setup Programming Programming H4 08 Programming 0 to 20 Selects drive station node number address for 020850 Drive Node Address 0 to FF 5 01 terminals R R 5 S 7 Programming Serial Comm Adr BO ND H5 08 1 An address of 0 disables serial com 0 to 63 H5 08 2 Selects the baud rate for terminals R R S and S 0 1200 Baud Communication Speed Selection 1 2400 Baud Serial Baud Rate 2 4800 Baud APOGEE FLN 3 9600 Baud Metasys N2 4 19200 Baud H5 02 0 to 4 Programming Selects the communication parity for terminals R S and S 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected Stopping Method after 9 1 Coast to Stop Communication Error 0 to 3 Serial Fault Sel 645 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at d1 04 available when 5 08 1 2 METASYS or 2 FLN APOGEE Communication Parity Selection 5 03 0 to 2 Programming Serial Com Sel H5 04 Programming Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function Communication Error Detection 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a Selection communications fault
111. CELTIMET ow mo Lock PANEL UNLOCK 1 9 tock uxt LAO STALLPRERN 9 L3 9 STALL PRE AC L3 02 SINEERRERC 13 EZO o m NM 3 Tr Ls Communications D 20 Table D 13 APOGEE FLN Application ee Point Number Summary Continued SI Units SI Units SI Units SI Units Text Text Parameter v wr ee a o oo o o Mumour or 9 or urne wy Mumours or 9 or urne serre ono bo di ec dL O m Hw o 98 5 9 9 99 o wer 9 Hz 9 tao 9 9 L 99 52 9 9 dT 99 o f 1 7 4 tao Powertosser se 9 9 L9 s tao moron dT 7 tao meorwon dT a 787 _ 187 ior ORF ON TR inr UTR mergi off om L more
112. CK Quick Setting Menu 16 ADV Programming Menu 18 VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters Menu 20 Auto Tuning Menu 2 2 22 21 Example of Changing a Parameter 22 Control Panel 3 1 Digital Operator and Control Panel Display The various items included on the Digital Operator Display and Control Panel are described below Alpha Numeric Drive Digital LCD Digital Display Operator Keypad Menu Indicating LCDs Drive Keypad Operator Status Indicating LEDs Drive Bypass and HAND OFF AUTO H O A Control Keypad Selector Keys Fig 3 1 E7 Bypass Control Panel Component Names and Functions The front control panel has a digital alpha numeric display and keypad in the upper portion for Drive operation and program ming The row of LEDs above the alpha numeric display indicate Drive operational status See Table 3 2 for an explanation The row of LEDs below the alpha numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active The lower portion of the front control panel displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND OFF AUTO functions for both the Drive and Bypass The general rule for LED colors in the lower portion of the control panel 16 Green Normal Status Amber Abnormal Status Red Fault Status Control Panel 3 2 Digital Ope
113. CONNECTIONS JUMPER LOCATION SAFETY INTERLOCKS SEE SH 2 NOTE 7 AUTO MODE RUN STOP BAS DAMPER INTERLOCK SEE SH 2 NOTE 8 REMOTE TRANSFER SMOKE PURGE SPARE USER SUPPLY COMMON 120VAC DIGITAL SEE SH 2 NOTE 9 MOTOR RUN DRIVE RUN OR BYPASS RUN NO DRIVE MOL OR SAFETIES FAULT AND PROGRAMMABLE RELAYS 1 2 amp 3 SELECTIONS AVAILABLE BYPASS RUN DAMPER ACTUATOR OUTPUT AUTO TRANSFER DRIVE RUN SERIAL COMM RUN COMMAND HAND MODE ACTIVE AUTO MODE ACTIVE SYSTEM FAULT AS SELECTED BY ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB DIP SWITCHES S2 AND S3 SEE SHEET 3 TABLE 5 JUMPER INTERNAL SUPPLY 120 VAC LOGIC 1 MIN RATING OF CONTACTS SMA 120 ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB J1 1 2 3 FACTORY SETTING CONTACTS FOR CUSTOMER USE RATED 5A 24VDC 120VAC 15 MAX CUSTOMER MUST PROVIDE PROPER SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND MEANS OF DISCONNECT 1 OPTION P 3 15 PSI PRESSURE TRANSDUCER A4 5 15 PSI 14 5 PSI PNEUMATIC SIGNAL Electrical Installation 2 24 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 120 VAC LOGIC MIN RATING OF CONTACTS 5MA 120VAC 1 20VAC 15 25MA MIN 4MA MAX LEAKAGE CURRENT ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 24 VDC LOGIC 1 2 24VDC 15 25MA 4MA MAX LEAKAGE CURRENT 14 BH MIN RATING OF CONTACTS 5 24VDC 6
114. Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection Selects how Terminal A2 Sel Aux Ref 9600 Baud TABLE 5 2 TABLE 5 2 TABLE 5 2 TABLE 5 2 Metasys 0 0 10 0 L4 05 1 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Deter Ref Loss Sel Stop mines Drive response to loss of the frequency speed command 2 gt Programming 5 4 Table 5 1 Bypass Parameter Settings Continued eee OPTIONAL LCD Default For Bypass Setting L5 01 10 0 Number of Re start Attempts Sets the number of Num of Restarts 0 10 Bodl a bul the Drive will perform an automatic re start pem L5 03 SEC Restart Time After Fault If not success Max Restart Time fully started after this time restart attempts stop and 5 600 0 Drive faults 01 Drive Local Remote Key Function Selection Enables Local Remote Key P 02 Drive OFF Key Function During Auto Run Enables Oper STOP Key NN 03 du User Parameter Default Value Stores Bypass User Defaults parameter settings for recall via A1 03 1110 User Set Defaults 15 N A Drive Hand Key Function Selection Enables or dis Hand Key Disabled 3 02 Read Allowed Selection Enables or disables keypad Read Allowable Enabled eee The shaded Bypass Parameter Settings in Table 5 1 document Drive parameter settings required to interface with the Bypass logic circuit that have been established at the factory and st
115. Drive and Bypass unit Parameter b1 02 specifies from where the run command for the Drive will be accepted This parameter is by default set to 1 Terminals This setting is required by the Bypass logic circuit To issue a run command from the control panel Press the HAND key of the Hand Off Auto selector To issue a run command from a remote source such as a BAS The Hand Off Auto selector must be in the AUTO position A contact closure between terminals TB1 2 and 1 9 will control the Drive or Bypass start and stop operation To issue a run command via serial communication Set the parameters indicated in Table 5 2 for the desired serial communication option Connect the RS 485 422 serial communication cable to TB4 3 R TB4 4 R TB4 1 S and TB4 2 S on the E7N PCB A2 B b1 03 Stopping Method There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the Run command is removed Seting Db 7309 Ramp to Stop factory default DC Injection to Stop 0 Ramp to stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will decelerate the motor to 0 rpm The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time The factory default Decel Time is in parameter C1 02 Programming 5 13 When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency 52 01 Default 0 5HZ DC current will be injected in the motor at a level determined by b2 02 50 Default The DC Injection condition will occur for th
116. Elapsed Timer as the Power On monitor then 01 01 must be set to 13 and 01 02 must be set to 4 The next time Drive power is cycled the digital operator displays U1 13 Elapsed Time Programming 5 72 B 01 03 Digital Operator Display Scaling Seting O o Hie Gator RPM Enter of Motor Poles 40 39999 User Display Parameter 01 03 allows the programmer to change the units in which the speed monitors and some speed parameters are displayed The 01 03 parameter will change the units of the following e 71 01 Frequency Reference Monitor e 01 02 Output Frequency Monitor e Ul1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start e 1 01 through 41 17 Preset Frequency References and Jog Reference The table below details how the setting of 01 03 will affect the way the listed monitors and parameters will be displayed o8 ____ 2 through 39 ORPM enter the of motor poles 40 through 39999 Engineering Units The factory default setting 01 03 0 sets the Drive up to display the affected monitors and parameters in terms of hertz Hz If the speeds seem more natural in terms of percentage of maximum set 01 03 1 If the speeds are easier to work with when dis playing the equivalent synchronous motor RPM set o1 03 the number of motor poles If another engineered unit such as fpm or gpm is desired set 01 03 xxxx where AAAAA Digit 5 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digits
117. KAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control Without exception all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part s safe use and operation Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IS OFFERED YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury property damage losses or claims arising from misapplication of its products AWARNING Read and understand this manual before installing operating or servicing this Drive and Bypass Unit All warnings cautions and instructions must be followed All activity must be performed by qualified personnel The Drive must be installed accord ing to this manual and local codes Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power 15
118. L 3 OPEN BI 12 MULTI FUNCTION OUTPUT 3 H2 03 BI 13 SAFETY INTERLOCK MONITOR BI 14 HAND AUTO REFERENCE MONITOR BI 15 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 1 MONITOR BI 16 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 2 MONITOR BI 17 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 3 MONITOR BI 18 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 4 MONITOR BI 19 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 5 MONITOR Metasys N2 Binary Output BO Summary Table 0 12 Metasys 2 Binary Output Summary Metasys 2 to E7 Objectib 9 LLL LLL BO 7 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 3 H1 03 MULTI FUNCTION INPUT 4 H1 04 BOS MULTFFUNCTIONINPUTS HOS LOCAL REMOTE AND LOCAL REMOTE AND BO 10 PANEL LOCK STOP RESET KEYS STOP RESET KEYS ENABLED DISABLED EFO NOT ACTIVATED IF EFO ACTIVATED IF ES ELE CABLE LOSS OCCURS CABLE LOSS OCCURS Communications D 18 Mailbox Function Points B Reading a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter AO 30 Specifies the parameter to be read from the E7 Drive AT 38 Reports the value of the parameter specified in AO 30 When this point is read it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller Example Writing a value of 387 183 hex to AO 30 specifies Drive parameter b1 04 Reading AI 38 returns the current setting of parameter b1 04 to the controller B Writing to a Drive Parameter Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter AO 31 Specifies the parameter to be written to AO 32 Entry location of the value to be written to
119. List Continued Setting Description Range 1E Ref Sample Hold Analog speed command is sampled then held at time of input closure 20 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Ramp To Stop 21 External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Ramp To Stop 22 External fault Normally Open During Run Ramp To Stop 23 External fault Normally Closed During Run Ramp To Stop 24 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Coast To Stop 25 External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Coast To Stop 26 External fault Normally Open During Run Coast To Stop 27 External fault Normally Closed During Run Coast To Stop 28 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop 29 External fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop 2A External fault Normally Open During Run Fast Stop 2B External fault Normally Closed During Run Fast Stop 2C External fault Normally Open Always Detected Alarm Only 2D External fault Normally Closed Always Detected Alarm Only 2E External fault Normally Open During Run Alarm Only 2F External fault Normally Closed During Run Alarm Only 30 PI Integral Reset Resets the PI Integral component to zero when closed 31 PI Integral Hold Holds the PI integral value when closed 34 PI SFS Cancel SFS SoftStart also called Accel Decel See Parameter b5 17 35 PI Input Level Sel Inverts the PI error signal when closed 36 Option Inv Sel 2 Selec
120. PUT 3 6 2 S CONTACTOR SEE SH 2 TABLE 2 mime i FOR 1 RATINGS i prs zl oR A Ses CS E ql OPTION D FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH N F3 Iho No 4 E OPTION DELTA WYE 5 CAPACITIVE INPUT FILTER YEL YEL YEL TO DRIVE Los e e TERMINAL I OPTION Xa R 5 OR Remove sumper M AP TION 15 BUS REACTOR E7 BUS OPTIONS X OR Z DRIVE REACTOR TO ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB CONNECTOR CN102 DRIVE KEYPAD CONTROL PART NUMBER BOARD Py 9 STD LED DISPLAY 55 OR PART NUMBER 111 ECHNICAL MANUAL FOR UOP000010 NETWORK OPT Y LCD DISPLAY CONNECTIONS APPROPRIATE TECHNICA 0 OPTION E B GREEN _ N LEAD WIRE K2 PG1 P SEE SH 2 E 1 SEE SH 2 NOTE 2 111 T2 T3 11 1 17 L2 1 18 TO A2 Electrical Installation 2 23 111 112 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMER _ T1 EG1 PG2 SEE NOTE ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB uu TCU A 1 2 OPTION DRIVE INPUT er PART NUMBER 2 A1 Im UTCOO0044 ay ed Se rd SRD POOR NS Jd F1
121. QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE oe o DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Advanced Programming Menu DATA ENTER ee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE When returning from a setting display the rightmost digit of the monitor display will flash DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Autotuning If a user constant is changed Menu the number will be displayed DATA DATA ENTER ENTER S DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK RDY VERIFY A TUNE Menu Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays iX Lit Flashing Not lit Fig 3 3 Menu Transitions When running the Drive after using the Digital Operator press the MENU Key to enter the Drive menu DRIVE indicator will flash and then press the DATA ENTER Key from the drive menu display to bring up the monitor display DRIVE indicator will light Monitor display in the drive menu will appear when the power is turned ON Control Panel 3 12 DRIVE Operation Menu This menu is used for setting a speed command or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces The Drive may be limited to this menu in order to accept a run command see parameter b1 08 in Chapter 5 and Ta
122. S CONTROL PCB SAFETY INTERLOCKS AUTO MODE RUN STOP BAS DAMPER INTERLOCK Control REMOTE TRANSFER Circuit SMOKE PURGE Outputs MIN RATING V SPARE 6 OF CONTACTS 5MA 120VAC USER SUPPLY COMMON ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB J1 E 1 2 PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 1 FACTORY SETTING IS HAND MODE e 3 FACTORY SETTING Customer Provided Control Circuit Inputs Wy ial FACTORY SETTING IS AUTO MODE PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 3 FACTORY SETTING EN IS SYSTEM FAULT ISOLATED E AC 4 20MADC OR V 0 10VDC AUTO MODE Sra SPEED ne A A1 A2 FACTORY SETTING 15 4 20mA CONNECTED DRIVE 5 DRIVE TERMINAL 2 AS SELECTED BY SWITCH TERMINAL AS SELECTED BY 51 2 3 amp 4 SP DIP SWITCH S1 2 3 amp 4 DRIVE SEE SH 2 TABLE 4 FM DRIVE FM MONITOR OUTPUT TERMINAL FACTORY SETTING 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC SN IS 4 20MADC AS SELECTED BY JUMPER J2 CONNECTED TO DRIVE FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC NOT ANALOG INPUT 2 A2 USED CN103 DRIVE SHIELD TERMINAL S7 INPUT DRIVE TERMINAL S6 INPUT DRIVE AM MONITOR OUPUT OPTIONS 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC aM J UORV shee AS SELECTED BY JUMPER J3 i LN FACTORY SETTING IS 4 20MADC METASYS J APOGEE U 5 422 485 MODBUS FACTORY SETTINGS COMMUNICATIONS V i Wem 1 15VDC 20mA SEE THE 1 APPROPRIATE 5 5 A2 TECHNICAL 4 20MADC OR 0 10VDC MAN
123. S PROPERLY ENDORSED 7 14 4 MOUNTING HOLES 90 34 8 7 in fu ceu N 9 eT ei gt 2 8 e giu NOTES 1 LED OPERATOR SHOWN 3 70 2 MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS SHOWN WHEN APPLICABLE 3 DIMENSIONS ARE IN inch mm PROJECT NAME SYSTEM TAG MODEL HP AMPS VOLTS WEIGHT FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONSULT MANUAL Drawing Number DD E7N 203 01 Fig 1 11 Enclosure 1 for up to 10 HP 208 VAC and up to 20 HP 480 VAC NEMA 1 Physical Installation 1 15 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED 14 25 362 07 15 43 391 92 4 MOUNTING HOLES 44 12 39 1 3459 52 38 1330 33 3455 877 57 4 38 16 87 11114 1 428 61 410 104 24 RECOMMENDED CONDUIT ENTRANCE AREA BOTTOM NOTES 10 84 1 LED OPERATOR NOT SHOWN 275 46 2 MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS SHOWN WHEN APPLICABLE 3 DIMENSIONS ARE IN inch mm i 1 93 j 48 90 PROJECT NAME SYSTEM TAG ff MODEL WEIGHT FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS CONSULT MANUAL Drawing Number DD E7N 255 01 Fig 1 12 Enclosure 2 for 15 25 HP 208 VAC and 25 50 HP 480 VAC NEMA 1 Physical Installation 1 16 Dimensions and Weights Table 1 5 Bypass Dimensions and Weights Rated Continuous l NEMA 1 Wall Output Nominal Bypass Dimensions inches a Mounting Current 7 E7N Dimensions Amps Height Width
124. See Table 2 8 Figure 2 5 and Schematic Diagram DS E7N 01 for clarification of the analog input configuration and applica tions Table 2 8 Analog Input Auto Mode DIP Switches Drive Applications 3 Speed Diff Connected Command Feedback Feedback Level 0 to 10 VDC aoma ON ON OF 2 msa X X o ON OF o msa X 5 9 Signal Level 4 to 20 mA ON N A N A 2 TBS 9to A2 7183 15 Transducer ow OVD or NA NA o 1 X Electrical Installation 2 12 B Analog Input A2 Configuration Dip Switch Speed Command or Feedback Result Switch 51 2 2500 Fig 2 5 Analog Input 2 Configuration B Analog Input Drive Speed Control Circuit Wiring Keep this lead length as short as possible 50 m max to maintain signal quality Insulated twisted shielded pair wire 2 con ductor 18 ga Belden 8760 or equivalent is required Do not run these wires in the same conduits as other AC power or con trol wires The shield must be connected on this end only stub and isolate the other end The signal employed is 4 to 20 mA with parameter H3 08 set for 2 4 20 mA For 0 to 10 VDC parameter H3 08 15 set for 0 0 10 VDC and the control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must be in the OFF position When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer and not from a Digita
125. Transfer Transfer to Bypass when Closed Contacts signals TB1 9 TB1 5 a Smoke Purge Transfer to Bypass when Closed 5 4 Ha Drive Input Terminal S7 Programmable Input TB5 2 TB5 5 a Drive Input Terminal S6 Programmable Input a power supply power supply for analog TB3 2 15 VDC 15 VDC ly for analog Transmi is 2 n ias oed i SION CM Do Function set by 4 to 20 mA 250Q Terminal A2 by DIP switches H3 08 and DIP s itch S1 2 H3 09 0 to 10 20 51 3 and 51 4 TB3 3 Analog Input or Speed Command Anal when connected to Drive 5 Terminal Al by DIP switches 0 to 10 VDC 100 0 to 10 V 20 kQ signals S1 3 and S1 4 4 to 20 mA 100 or 0 to 10 5 9 Multi function analog input VDC 1 a Function set by 4 to 20 mA 250Q connected to Drive terminal A2 H3 08 and DIP switch 51 2 H3 09 0 to 10 V 20 kQ TB3 1 PE Shield wire optional ground line connection point 1 10 Motor Run CLOSED During Motor Operation 1 12 1 13 Programmable Relay 1 m 22 Digital 181 14 2 Damper Actuator Dry contacts output TB2 1 3 Auto Transfer Contact capacity signals A Drive Run 5 max at 250 VAC TB2 2 Programmable Relay 2 Rm 5 max at 120 VAC TB2 3 6 Hand Mode TB2 4 7 Auto Mode TB2 5 Programmable Relay 3 8 System Fault See Table 2 6 for DIP Switch programming efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 21 Table 2 15 Bypass Control Circuit Term
126. Transfer to Bypass This function allows a contact closure from a BAS between terminals TB1 4 and TB1 9 to transfer motor operation from Drive mode to Bypass mode This remote transfer to Bypass function overrides the DRIVE BYPASS selector keys An open contact causes operation in Drive mode and a closed contact results in Bypass mode Smoke Purge This function allows a contact closure between terminals TB1 5 and TB1 9 to transfer motor operation to Bypass for a maxi mum capacity smoke control function When in smoke purge mode during emergency fire smoke situations the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment Note Smoke purge overrides all other control inputs and selector switches Smoke purge operation can only be terminated by opening the contact closure at terminals TB1 5 and TB1 9 or by opening the Disconnect Switch otart Up and Operation 4 14 Chapter 5 Programming This Manual contains descriptions of all parameters in the Drive that may be useful in Bypass applications Parameters are listed in aloha numerical order Parameter number and name along with a detailed description and its settings are described on the following pages For descriptions of all drive parameters see the Programming Manual TM E7 02 Regarding Chapter 5 2 otandard LED Keypad Display and Optional LCD Keypad Bis m
127. UAL FOR t 0 10 AS SELECTED BY NETWORK e VDC e 3 DIP SW S1 2 CONNECTIONS FACTORY SETTING 15 TB3 4 TB5 6 4 20MADC FM AM Fig 2 9 Bypass Control Circuit Inputs and Outputs Customer provided contact closure inputs must have a minimum rating of 5 mA at 120 VAC Electrical Installation 2 19 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED i 5 120 LOGIC MIN RATING OF CONTACTS 5MA 120VAC 120VAC 15 25MA MIN 4MA MAX LEAKAGE CURRENT ELECTRONIC BYPASS CONTROL PCB J1 Table 2 14 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Bypass Units Recommended Wire Size AWG Wire Type Tightening Possible Terminal Torque Wire Sizes Screws Ib in AWG mm Terminals mm 1 1 to 14 TB2 1 to 6 TB3 1 to 4 Stranded Phoenix 4 2 to 5 3 wire 18 3 0 5 to 0 6 26 to 16 0 75 Shielded twisted pair wire 0 14 to 1 5 Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable 1 TB4 1 to 4 TB5 1 to 9 20 to 14 PE TE 7 0 to 8 8 p 12 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 22 1 25 1 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external speed command 2 We recommend using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability 3 We recommend using a thin slot screwdriver with a 3 5 mm blade width Wiring Checks After all wiring is completed perform the following checks 1 Is all wiring correct
128. W D DS E7N 01 Inst Manual TM E7N 01 CD E7 01 77 YASKAWA UNPNO001 Fig 1 1 Bypass Nameplate Example Physical Installation 1 5 B Drive Nameplate Information A nameplate is also attached to the right side of the Drive inside the Bypass enclosure The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive Drive Model Number Input Power Specifications Drive Enclosure and Revision Code MODEL CIMR E7U2011 INFUT 200 240V 506092 SPEC 20H 11A OUTPUT AC3PH O 240V O 4D0Hz 45A 17kVA Hg p up A S EH ERE LUE UG LE FILE E131457 Output Power Specifications Weight Serial Number UL File Number Fig 1 2 Drive Nameplate Example Bypass Unit Model Numbers The model number on the nameplate of the Bypass unit indicates the enclosure voltage Drive rated current and options of the Bypass unit in alphanumeric codes E7NVBO21 0 OGXOOYL E7N 2 Contactor Bypass 0 Not Enabled leave blank Enclosure L J Enable METASYS N2 U Enable Siemens APOGEE D 3 B 480V eee NEC Rated Amps 001 074 0 LED Style Drive Keypad 021 21A Y LCD Style Drive Keypad 3 15 PSI Transducer 0 Disconnect Switch None leave blank 3 15 PSI Transducer D Fused Disconnect Custom Nameplates InputFilter None leave blank 0 None leave blank Custom Nameplates IN Cap Filter Drive Input Circuit oN e IT one leave blan None leave blank
129. X X 3 X X X 4 X X X 2 X X X 6 X X X 7 X X 8 X X Suggested settings for Loss of Load indication Programming 5 67 After selecting the proper detection scheme the Torque Detection Level L6 02 must be specified If the current level read by the output current transformers rises above overtorque or drops below undertorque this level and remains there for at least the Torque Detection Time L6 03 then the Torque Detection Function will change the state of any digital output configured for Torque Detection H2 01 H2 02 Trq Det 1 N O or 17 Trq Det 1 N C Torque detection level 10 9 3 5 L6 03 2695 Closed O Q D D Open 2 TIME When the output current drops below the Torque Detection Level by approximately 10 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 36 Over Torque Detection Torque detection level 10 L6 02 55 5 5 O O c o 5 6 a gt 5 e282 Closed oOo022 ZAO Open TIME When the output current rises above the Torque Detection Level by approximately 10 of the Drive s rated output current the digital output is reset Fig 5 37 Under Torque Detection Programming 5 68 L8 Hardware Protection B L8 01 Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection Seting 0 NotProvided factory default This parameter is not applicable for Drive operation 8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level Set
130. ad and LCD Keypad SG E7L 10 E7L Drive Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification SG E7N 10 See also www yaskawa com E7N Narrow Bypass Package Mechanical Submittal Specification Introduction v Notes Introduction vi Table of Contents Quick Reference Parameter 151 Inside front cover copine d nie adiu MATERNO CHO Chapter 1 Physical Installation oor ione ooo 1 1 Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style 2 e T _ 3 Contirtatonsupom 5 Bypass 7 Bypass Component Descriptions 8 nennen 9 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 15 Checking and Controlling Installation Site 18 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation c e D wg a mr cu 2 1 Termination Configuration Power Wiring 2 Contor WV NING irmana 8 VV IAG st descen Cabot osi u oic ote Econ 23 Electrical OVVIE C _____ 25 Chapter 3
131. after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time Current Detection Method b3 01 2 or 3 The current detection method starts searching from a predetermined frequency while monitoring the Drive output current to determine when the rotor speed and the Drive output speed frequency match The current detection version is not bi directional To enable current detection Speed Search at start set b3 01 3 SpdscrhI enable and program any digital input equal to Speed Search 1 0 61 or Speed Search 2 1 0 62 Speed Search 1 will start searching from the max frequency E1 04 and ramp down to meet the rotor speed Speed Search 2 will start search ing from the set frequency and ramp down to meet the rotor speed IMPORTANT If a UV1 fault occurs when current detection Speed Search is attempted increase the setting of L2 04 IMPORTANT If an OC fault occurs when Speed Search is attempted after power loss recovery increase the setting of L2 03 Programming 5 20 OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3 03 Maximum output pred Set frequency frequency or set frequency Run command Output frequency b3 02 Speed search current level Output current Minimum baseblock time Lower limit is set using Speed Search Delay Time b3 05 L2 03 Fig 5 10 Speed Search Current Detection Method at Startup AC power supply Output frequ
132. ameter No Frequency Reference Display Units Frq Display Unit 01 09 Local Remote Key Function Selection Local Remote Key 02 01 OFF Key Function During Auto Run Oper OFF Key 02 02 User Parameter Default Value 02 03 User Defaults Drive kVA Selection 02504 Inverter Model Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection Operator M O P 02 05 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Oper Detection 02 06 Cumulative Operation Time Setting Elapsed Time Set 02 07 Cumulative Operation Time Selection Elapsed Time Run Initialization Specification Selection Init Mode Sel Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters and frequency related monitors when 01 03240 WC InchOfWater PSEIb SqrInch GPM Gallons Min F DegFahrenheit CFM Cubic ft Min CMH Cubic M Hr LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Key Selections Determines the status of the Local Remote key if present 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Has no function when H O A operator is connected Determines if the off key on the digital operator will stop the drive when drive is operating from external terminals or serial communications 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Allows storing of current parameter values as a User Initialization Selection at parameter
133. ameter to the motor rated Full Load Amps FLA shown on the motor nameplate This is essential for proper Drive operation and motor overload protection Note Do not include the service factor amps Press the MENU key to return to the DRIVE menu and the same operational status LED configuration described in step 2 above The alpha numeric display will now be the speed command frequency To start the motor in Drive mode press the HAND key The DRIVE Run LEDs red and green and the HAND LED amber will light and the Drive output will ramp up to 6 HZ Verify that motor rotation is correct If the direction of motor rotation is wrong press the OFF key and turn the Power OFF Wait for the red CHARGE LED near the Drive power terminals to go out When it does swap the wires for T1 amp T2 on the output terminals of the motor Overload Relay Tighten the terminal lugs reapply the power press the HAND key and re check the rotation direction With correct motor rotation press the MENU key if necessary to return to the DRIVE menu Press DATA ENTER as needed to get F flashing then using the and V keys manually run the Drive throughout its entire speed range while observing operation If excessive vibration of the driven load is noted at specific frequencies speeds the Jump Frequency function may be used to eliminate this vibration by programming d3 01 through d3 04 Press the OFF key Determine whether the remote speed com
134. amme Torque Detection Time 1 Sets the length of time an overtorque undertorque L6 03 4 condition must exist before being recognized by the 0 0 to 10 0 10 0sec Programming Loss Det Time drive OL3 is then displayed Parameters A 21 Parameter L8 01 L8 02 L8 03 L8 06 L8 09 L8 10 L8 11 L8 12 L8 15 L8 18 L8 19 o L8 32 1 01 1 02 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Internal Dynamic Braking Resis tor Protection Selection DB Resistor Prot Overheat Pre Alarm Level OH Pre Alarm Lvl Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre Alarm Sel Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Hdwe Protection 0 Not Provided 1 Provided When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter an overheat pre alarm OH will occur Drive Operation upon OH Pre Alarm Detection 0 Ramp to Stop Decel Time C1 02 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 3 Alarm Only 0 to 2 is recognized as fault detection and 3 is recognized as alarm For the fault detection the fault contact operates 4 OH Alarm amp Reduce Continue operation and reduce output frequency by L8 19 Setting Range Oor 1 50 to 130 0 to 4 Factory Setting kVA Dependent Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Input Phase Loss Detection Level Monitors the DC Bus current ripple and activates when 0 0 t
135. amwNM wemmpa 31 9 o mon 3 9 5 mom 3 9 XT oo EN Low T iprerwps 0 5 orm 1 9 3 morRMDT SEC emuossQ 9 09 9 9 p A ru NE S i b5 04 b5 06 b5 07 b5 08 b5 12 b5 13 0 NT ce sea P 0 d1 04 Communications D 24 APOGEE Logical Digital Input LDI Summary Table D 16 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Digital Input LDI Summary m to T oe FLN Point Off 0 On 1 n mom o 3 om FAUT ineo L8 eer o nen pes orna ON Ul 12 Bi m m n 3 oe 98 3 ___ _ 1 9 9 NOAGR AGREE UI I2 bmvEREADY _ 1 9 9 9 i NOTRDY READY Bs Lx S 1 3 OTE TORT 1 1 m E a 3 4 Cw UR WO ON 01 10 2 MFINIMON WON nO 2 22 RR SS 0 IC 23 5 oKkmur 0 o T raur ori ae CONTE IT _ 3 oF Ne m m APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Output LDO Summary Table D 17 APOGEE FLN
136. ance 2 DIP Switch S1 1 located on E7N terminal board Terminating resistanc 1 2W 110 Ohms Fig D 2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistance 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cable and use proper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communication connect 5 to R and S to R on the control circuit terminal board See Fig D 3 below 4 Shield at one end only TB4 3 TB4 4 TB4 1 4 2 Fig D 3 RS 485 Communication Connection Procedure for Setting Up Communication Use the following procedure to perform communication with the DDC Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Drive 2 Turn ON the input power to the Drive 3 Set the required communication parameters H5 01 to H5 09 using the Digital Operator 4 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared 5 Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again 6 Perform communication with the DDC Communications D 4 E Related Parameters Table D 2 Serial Communication Related Parameters Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source b1 01 Run Command Selection 51 02 Run Source Drive Node Add
137. ance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance Drive Bypass YASKAWA YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 or 1 847 887 7000 Fax 847 887 7370 Internet http www yaskawa com YEA Document Number TM E7N 01 03 01 2009 Rev 09 03 Data subject to change without notice Yaskawa Electric America Inc
138. armonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current The bus reactor 15 wired to the Drive 1 and 2 DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 5 input reactor This option is only used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component 25 HP and below 208 VAC 25 HP and 30 HP and below 480 VAC Option 3 Serial Communication BACnet interface An isolated RS 422 485 circuit board provides BACnet protocol for network com munication to a BAS This option plugs into the CN2 connection on the Drive control circuit board Physical Installation 1 8 Bypass Component Descriptions Bypass Unit Front Control Panel The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Bypass unit is shown in Figures 1 4 through 1 8 Drive B B Keypad Operator Drive Operational ais Status Alpha Numeric LCD Display Indicating LED s sss HOA Keypad Disconnect Handle Fig 1 4 E7N Bypass Unit Appearance amp E7N Control Panel with Keypad Operator Controls B Keypad Control Panel Operator In a Bypass unit the Drive keypad control panel operator is mounted flush with the hinged door of the enclosure The Keypad Control Operator is equipped with 6 LED illuminated selector keys Hand Off Auto Drive Select Bypass Select and Drive Test The E7N also features 11 other status LED indicators Control Power Drive Ready Drive Run Dri
139. at 5th Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 5 Cumulative Operation Time at 6 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 6 Cumulative Operation Time at 7 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 7 Cumulative Operation Time at 8 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 8 Cumulative Operation Time at 9 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 9 U3 20 Cumulative Operation Time at 10 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 10 Note Faults such as CPF00 01 CPF02 CPF03 UV1 7 02 are not stored in fault history U3 03 U3 07 U3 08 U3 09 U3 10 U3 11 U3 12 U3 13 U3 14 U3 15 U3 16 U3 17 U3 18 U3 19 Parameters A 29 Decimal to Hex Conversion Table A 5 Decimal Parameters A 30 Appendix Capacity Related Parameters This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of 02 04 Drive Capacity e EN 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 3 Capacity Related Parameter 5 4 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Drive Capacity Parameter 02 04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number Parameter 02 04 will need to be adjusted when replacing a control board If a Control PCB is changed the first time the Drive is powered up parameter 02
140. at the motor 2 Instead verify that power is OFF Then swap the wires for L1 amp L2 on the input side of the Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker This will effect rotation in Bypass operation only Once connections are complete and tight reapply the incoming power and repeat the previous step to re check the rotation direction in Bypass mode Run the motor in Bypass by pressing the HAND key Record all the phase voltages and currents at this time Press the OFF key and press the DRIVE Select key Press the HAND key and press the DATA ENTER key then scroll the Speed Command to 60 HZ operation Monitor the voltages and currents in each of the output phases at full speed to make sure that the voltages are balanced and that the currents are within the motor nameplate rating during accel stable speed and decel If this application requires the Drive to operate in PI mode see Chapter 5 For serial communication refer to Appendix D in this manual or TM E7 21 APOGEE FLN and TM E7 22 Metasys N2 otart Up and Operation 4 8 Notes start Up and Operation 4 9 Bypass Unit Operation Description For selector key positions control inputs and DIP switch selectable functions The Bypass has two modes of operation Bypass and Drive When in the Bypass mode the connected motor is run directly from the incoming AC line whereas in Drive mode the motor is run from the Drive output The DRIVE Select and Bypass Select keys located o
141. atches or other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or the appropriate tool to check for tightness If you find any irregularities in the above items contact the shipping company the distributor or representative you purchased the Bypass unit from or your Yaskawa office immediately Is the Bypass unit damaged in any way The Bypass unit is thoroughly tested at the factory Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier that transported the material Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty After unpacking and inspecting for damage verify that internal wire connections have not come loose during shipment by spot checking wire terminations with a screwdriver or the appropriate tool Bypass unit storage must be in a clean and dry location Maintain the factory packaging and provide covering as needed to pro tect the Bypass unit from construction site dirt water debris and traffic prior to and during construction Nameplate Information A nameplate is attached to the right side of the enclosure and the inside of the door of each Bypass unit The nameplate shown below 15 an example for a standard Bypass unit A C INPUT Volts 480 Hz 50 60 Phase 3 Amps 71 6 A C OUTPUT Volts 0 480 Hz 0 60 Phase 3 Amps 65 Serial No 4W033727440 0002 Model No ETNVB065R Type E7N BYPASS
142. ation free from chlorides Install the Bypass unit in a location not in direct sunlight Install the Bypass unit on a non combustible surface Physical Installation 1 18 Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Bypass unit should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variations Do not store this Technical Manual or any other documents on the top surface of the Bypass unit they may cover the heat sink cooling air discharge opening and cause the unit to overheat If the Bypass unit is installed in an enclosure such as an electrical control box air handling unit use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the Bypass unit internal air temperature below 113 F 45 C Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter During Bypass unit installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Bypass unit To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Bypass unit place a temporary cover over the unit Always remove the temporary cover from the Bypass unit before start up Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Bypass unit to overheat Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations Install the Bypass unit vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency When installing the Bypass unit always provide the recommended installation clearances to allow no
143. aulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re install it Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 19 If the Motor Does Not Operate Use the following information if the motor does not operate B Ensure the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive B The motor does not operate when the HAND key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible The Speed Command Frequency Reference is too low If the Speed Command frequency reference 15 set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency B The motor does not operate when an external run command is input The following causes are possible The Drive is not in Drive mode If the Drive is not in Drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in Drive mode The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 20 B The motor stops during acceleration or when load is connected The load may be too high The Drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is to
144. back Level b5 27 then the Drive output shuts off Once the PI feedback drops below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 then normal Drive and PI operation return B b5 28 Feedback Square Root Function Activation Seting 0 Disabled factory default Enabled If b5 28 1 Enabled the square root of the PI feedback is compared to the PI Setpoint in order to determine appropriate Drive output to properly regulate the system This 1s helpful in cases where the measured feedback is pressure but the PI loop needs to regulate flow Programming 5 36 b5 29 Square Root Gain Setting Range 0 00 to 2 00 Factory Default 1 00 A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback B b5 30 Output Square Root Monitor Selection Seting 0 Disabled factory default Enabled If the PI Function is regulating the flow of a closed loop system by using a pressure feedback it may be convenient to view the square root of the PI output using monitor U1 37 b8 Energy Savings The energy savings function improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its highest efficiency This is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and adjusting the motor terminal voltage so that the motor always operates near its rated slip frequency A motor is most efficient when operating near rated slip conditions B b8 01 Energy Savings Selection Seting 0 Disabled facto
145. be accomplished through the DriveWizard software Part Number DWST616 C2 A free download from www drives com This menu is used in non bypass Drives to auto tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi directional speed search feature Fol low the key operations below to access the Auto Tuning Menu B For Reference Purposes Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display Autotuning Motor output power DATA D eoo DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY mm v A ES DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Motor rated current ESC 7 ENTER DATA 1 ENTER o K DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Autotuning start Autotuning Stop command input Pun te Ec 10 Autotuning completed gt DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE End cO eoe oe EO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Fig 3 8 Operation in Autotuning Menu Control Panel 3 21 Example of Changing a Parameter Table 3 19 provides an example of how to change parameter C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 from 30 sec to 20 sec Table 3 19 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu Digital Operator Display Description Number Power supply turned ON MENU Key pressed to enter drive menu MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming e menu DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE MENU Key pressed to enter advanced e o e o programming menu DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DATA ENTER pressed to access monitor display INCREASE o
146. ble 5 1 Example Operations Key operations in drive menu are shown in the following figure Menu Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Deleted Monitor Constant Monitor Display Frequency reference setting Drive Menu Eg Frequency reference DATA display unit 01 03 22 7 a 000 Esc DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY 5 Output current 2008 Monitor setting for 01 01 mi Ou DATA Frequency parerenge ENTER ESC mtm Fan operating ime 4i Operating time at error ENTER diem 4th previous error DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Fig 3 4 Operations in Drive Menu Control Panel 3 13 B U1 Monitor Parameter List Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monitor parameter list Monitor Parameters Control Panel 3 14 B U2 Fault Trace Parameter List After viewing the Monitor parameter list one may view the Fault Trace parameter list Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list U2 14 Elapsed Time Fault History Parameter List After viewing the Fault parameter list one may view the Fault History parameter list Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list U3 20 Elapsed Time 10 Control Panel 3 15 QUICK Quick Setting Menu This menu is used to set read a limited set
147. ble torque AC drive designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation including fans blowers and pumps new benchmark for size cost performance benefits and quality the Drive includes numerous built in features such as network communications H O A PI parameter storage and copy functions The Drive has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols Johnson Controls Metasyse N2 and Siemens FLN as well as Modbuse An optional LONWORKSe or BACnet interface card is also available The LED keypad operator is equipped with Hand Off Auto functions and copy feature User parameter settings can be recov ered at any time via User Initialization Optional DriveWizard software allows upload download as well as graphing and monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management Built in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system It includes feedback display inverse square root and differential control functions and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure flow or temperature regulation This manual is applicable to E7 Drives defined by model numbers CIMR E7U contained within Bypass units defined by model numbers This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the Yaskawa website www yaskawa com T
148. bled 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase Change direction of forward motor rotation 3 Exchange Phase Reverse Disabled Change direction of forward motor rotation and disable reverse operation Cycle External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive will not run Accept External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from hand local mode to auto remote mode the drive WILL run Disabled Run command accepted only in the operation menu Enabled Run command accepted in all menus except when b1 02 0 Selects the speed command input source in hand mode 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 Selects if drive will permit switching between HAND and AUTO modes while running 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Selects the emergency override reverse source 0 Use b1 14 Ref 1 Use AUTO Ref DC Braking Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop b1 03 0 is selected If b2 01 lt E1 09 DC Injection braking starts at E1 09 Selects the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current Sets the time length of DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second When b1 03 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows b2 04 10 Output Frequency E1 04 When b1 03 0 this parameter determ
149. circuit of NC contacts from devices such as a smoke fire sensor freeze up thermostat or high static pressure limit switch Verify that these customer emergency contacts are properly terminated in the Bypass safety shutdown circuit These contacts should be wired between terminal TB1 1 and TB1 9 No field programming is required Verify that all other field installed wires are correctly terminated included the shields Verify that the motor is wired for the application voltage Record the motor nameplate information Voltage Motor Rated Amps Verify that the input voltage matches the Bypass unit rating Verify that the motor rated full load amps FLA does not exceed the rated output current of the Drive and Bypass controlling it When multiple motors are simulaneously operated by the Drive the sum of all motor FLA values must be less than or equal to that of the Drive and Bypass controlling them Record any other connections to the Bypass unit by terminal number to determine if special programming of any of the following is required see Chapter 5 or TM E7 02 for programming details e Multi function Digital Inputs e Multi function Digital Outputs e Analog Outputs e Differential PI control 10 Verify that the building automation system logic is ready for the start stop and speed command functions Start Up and Operation 4 4 BYPASS UNIT START UP PROCEDURE Please review Bypass Start Up Preparation on page 4 4 The
150. ck loss whenever the feedback signal drops below the value of b5 13 and stays below that level for at least the time set into b5 14 See Figure 5 17 below for timing details Measured Feedback b5 13 To 4o wx T DE AE T b644 b5 14 ON CLOSED Feedback OFF OPEN Loss Digital Output TIME Fig 5 17 Loss of PI Feedback Feature B b5 15 Sleep Function Start Level Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz B b5 16 Sleep Delay Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds The Sleep Function can be programmed to prevent running the Drive when the PI loop output or the speed command 15 so low that no usable work is being done and or equipment damage may result The Sleep Function can be Enabled by entering a value in parameter b5 15 If the Drive s output drops below the level set by the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains there at least as long as the delay time determined by the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 then the Drive s internal Run command drops out and the Drive output ceases Though the Drive s output has ceased all other Drive functions continue Once the Drive s theoretical output returns to a level above the Sleep Function Start Level b5 15 and remains above that level for at least the Sleep Delay Time b5 16 the internal Run command returns and the Drive output begins again The b5 16 Delay Time prevents oscillation about the sleep level Note The sleep function can be us
151. correctly connected to the con CPF23 Communication Option Card trol board or an option board Option DPRAM Err Interconnection Fault that is not made for the Drive is attached to the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the option board Replace the control board Check for an external condition EFO a An external fault condition Opt External Fit Communication Option Card External Fault cen EF4 Ext Fault S4 External Fault at Terminal S4 Eid eH EE External Fault at Terminal S5 exists connected to a multi Ext Fault S5 py function digital input Ext Fault S6 PI Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss PI Feedback source receive the PI Feedback source FBL Detection is programmed to fault e g transducer sensor signal 65 12 2 and the building automation signal is PI Feedback PI Feedback Loss Detection not installed correctly or is not Check to ensure the PI Feedback Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss working source is installed and working Detection Time b5 14 properly Verify the parameters Verify communication signal Remove the fault from a multi function digital input Feedback Loss Remove the motor and run the Drive without the motor Output Ground Fault GF Drive output grounding current has Motor lead is shorted to Ground Fault exceeded 50 of the Drive rated output g
152. ct motor overload relay selector switches and indicating lights Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Stops for fuse blown 110 of rated output current for 60 seconds 208 240VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V 480VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V 208 240VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 V 480VAC Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V Power Interuptions of 15 ms or more By selecting the momentary power loss method operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Protection by thermistor Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Protection by electronic circuits 50 of inverter rated current Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 Vdc or more Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 CIMR E7U20P4 thru 2030 and 40P4 thru 4055 Open chassis type 00 CIMR E7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C NEMA 1 type 14 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type 95 max with no condensation 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc 3300 ft 1000 m higher altitudes by derate 10 to 20 Hz 32 ft sec 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 6 5 ft sec 2 m s max UL File E143427 opecifications C 4 Appendix D Communication This appendix details the specifications connections and programming
153. ction Display Scaling LCD Brightness Adjustment LCD Contrast Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Setting Factory Menu P Range Setting Location 1 to 20 Programming 100 to 200 150 Programming 0 0 to 10 0 Programming 30 to 1200 Programming 6 to 53 Sets how aggressively the drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor If overvoltage OV faults occur during HSB this parameter may need to be increased Sets the maximum current to be drawn during a HSB stop Higher n3 02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current and therefore increased motor heating Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1 09 Minimum Frequency If this time is set too low the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off Sets the time required for a HSB Overload Fault to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during a HSB stop Normally this does not need to be adjusted Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up when 01 02 4 Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up 1 Frequency Ref 2 Output Freq 3 Output Current 4 User Monitor set by 01 01 Programming 1 to 4 Programming Sets the units of the Frequency References d1 01 through d1 17 and the Frequency Reference Monitor U1 01 0 Hz 1 10096 E1 04 2 to 39
154. ction H5 07 RTS Control Selection 3 Multi step Ref 1 default 0 Disabled RTS always on 6C Com Inv Sel 2 1 Enabled RTS on only when sending default 1 04 Drive Terminal 56 Function Selection H5 08 Communication Protocol Selection 4 Multi step Ref 2 default 0 Modbus default 19 PI Disable 1 N2 Metasys H3 08 Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level 2 FLN APOGEE 0 0 10 VDC 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 2 4 20 mA default DIP Switch Reference 51 Terminating resistor always for option L otherwise only if last device S1 2 Drive Terminal A2 signal level On 4 20mA Off 0 10 VDC S4 2 Drive input terminal S4 operation On Input S4 operates inversely with input S5 Off Inputs S4 and S5 operate independently Notes Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key Auto mode run stop for Drive and Bypass without serial com is from terminal TB1 2 Auto mode run stop with serial com is from serial com for both Drive and Bypass modes DIP switch configurable terminal TB3 3 is connected to Drive terminal A2 the default See Chapter 2 Table 2 8 for the alternate TB3 3 configuration A Jumper is required from TB5 2 to TB5 7 This is essential for serial com applications and benign for all other applications Programming 5 25 B Optional LCD Digital Operator and Control Panel Display for Control In Table 5 5 the 01 0X parameter listed setup the Drive
155. cts d1 02 keypad as a preset default speed This input contact is closed when H O A Hand B Options J U V or L Serial Communications Bypass with serial communication for control Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Bypass from serial communication Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 01 H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select d1 01 pad as a preset speed An open contact selects serial com for speed command and run stop This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 02 Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5 2 H5 07 RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5 2 H5 08 Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Programming 5 8 B Options J U V or L Serial Communications Bypass with serial communication for run stop control and speed monitoring Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3 3 Drive terminal 2 Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop command fo
156. cy E1 04 and provide limits on any remote speed command input By entering upper or lower frequency limits the Drive programmer can prevent operation of the Drive above or below levels that may cause resonance equipment damage or discomfort see also parameter d3 0X For example limits may be needed to prevent low speed operation of cooling tower fans with gear boxes pumps with pressure dependent seals or AHUs with minimum delivery requirements Internal Soeed Command 42 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Operating Range d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Set Speed Command Note See also the Sleep function in Figure 5 18 for alternate lower limit implementation Fig 5 21 Frequency Reference Upper and Lower Limit Effects on the Speed Command Programming 5 41 d3 Jump Frequencies B 43 01 Jump Frequency 1 d3 02 Jump Frequency 2 d3 03 Jump Frequency 3 Setting Range 0 0 to 200 0 Hz Factory Default 0 0 Hz d3 04 Jump Frequency Width Setting Range 0 0 to 20 0 Hz Factory Default 1 0 Hz In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery the Drive can be programmed with jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specific frequency ranges If a speed is commanded that falls within a dead band or Jump Frequency the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just below the dead band and only accept higher spe
157. d Selection 0 Operator 3 9600 Baud default 1 Terminals default 2 4800 Baud H1 02 Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection H5 07 RTS Control Selection 3 Multi step Ref 1 14 Fault Reset default 0 Disabled RTS always on 1 Enabled RTS on only when sending default 1 03 Drive Terminal 55 Function Selection H5 08 Communication Protocol Selection 3 Multi step Ref 1 default 0 Modbus default 6C Com Inv Sel 2 1 N2 Metasys H3 08 Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level 2 FLN APOGEE 0 0 10 VDC 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 2 4 20 mA default d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 H3 09 Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection 0 Frequency Bias 2 Aux Reference default DIP Switch Reference 51 Terminating resistor always for option L otherwise on only if last device S1 2 Drive Terminal A2 signal level On 4 20mA Off 0 10 VDC S4 2 Drive input terminal S4 operation On Input S4 operates inversely with input S5 Off Inputs 54 and S5 operate independently Notes Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key Auto mode run stop for Drive and Bypass without serial com is from terminal 1 2 Auto mode run stop with serial com is from serial com for both Drive and Bypass modes DIP switch configurable terminal TB3 3 is connected to Drive terminal A2 the default See Chapter 2 Table 2 8 for the alternate TB3 3 configuration A Jumper is required from TB5
158. d all of the A2 parameters are locked unchangeable they can be unlocked by entering the correct password number into A 1 04 Once the correct password number is entered and the specified parameters are unlocked a 2 Wire or 3 Wire initialization will reset the password to 0000 B 1 05 Select Password Setting Range 0109999 Factory Default 0 When the value set into A1 04 does NOT match the value set into A1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 32 cannot be changed other parameters determined by 1 01 can be changed Parameter A1 05 can be accessed by displaying parame ter A1 04 then press and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously b1 Sequence The Sequence Group contains parameters associated with starting and stopping the Drive Parameters involving the Run Command Speed Reference location Stopping Method and Hand Auto changeover are located in this group B b1 01 Reference Speed Command Source Selection This 16 one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 ow Operator Digital Preset Speed 41 01 Terminals Analog Input Terminal 1 or Terminal 2 see Parameter H3 13 Serial Com RS 485 Terminals R R S and S Option PCB Option Board connected at 2CN In order to run the Drive and motor with the BYPASS DRIVE select keys in the DRIVE Select position the Drive must receive Run command and a speed command Parameter b1 0
159. d in Table 5 2 H5 08 Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Programming 5 9 Drive Parameters Initialization The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the Drive Parameters involving the display language access levels initialization and password are located in this group B 1 00 Select Language Optional LCD keypad only o enpo 3 gt hme SOS Emm Portugues The setting of parameter A1 00 determines which international language the Drive will use to display non numerical text The 1 00 parameter will not be changed by an Initialization of the Drive 1 03 1110 User Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial or 3330 3 Wire Initial If the Drive 15 accidentally set to a language unfamiliar to the operator locating the parameter to change the operator language can be done by performing the following 1 Press the MENU key until the ADV MENU is shown in the upper left corner of the digital operator 2 Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the programming menu The first parameter shown is A1 00 Select Language 3 Press the DATA ENTER key again and use the INCREASE and DECREASE arrow keys to choose the preferred language from the list below English Japanese Deutsch German Francais French Italiano Italian Espafiol Spanish Portugu s Portuguese
160. d the Monitor menu Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current displaying fault history or displaying the fault traces DRIVE Operation QUICK The Drive can be programmed in this menu Quick Setting Use this menu to set read the most commonly used parameters ADV The Drive can be programmed in this menu Programming Use this menu to set read every parameter VERIFY Modified Constants Parameters The Drive be programmed in this menu Use this menu to set read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings For Bypass units Auto Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software A TUNE Part Number DWST616 C2 A free download from www drives com Auto Tuning The Drive can be programmed in this menu Auto tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi directional speed search feature Control Panel 3 11 Main Menu Structure The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display Press the MENU key from the menu selection display to switch between the menus Press the DATA ENTER key from the menu selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display WARNING MENU Drive Menu DATA e e e e DRIVE QUICK VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Quick Programming Menu I DRIVE
161. d to terminal A2 and This field calibration may be needed if there 15 a job site variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneumatic signal input range B H3 12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Setting Range 0 0 to 2 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 30 Seconds An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic Drive control when a noisy analog reference is used Parameter H3 12 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to both the A1 and A2 analog inputs The Drive operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals gt Noisy input Internal Analog Input Valve signal Filtered Fig 5 29 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Effect on Noisy Signal Programming 5 58 B H3 13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection Setting Description LE cu Main Fref A1 factory default Main Fref Parameter H3 13 allows the programmer to select which analog input will serve as the Speed Command input when Termi nals are selected as the Auto Mode Speed source b1 01 1 Terminals or Terminal is selected as the reference source for the Hand mode b1 12 1 Terminals For the A2 analog input to be an effective selection for the H3 13 parameter param eter H3 09 must be configured as Aux Reference 3 09 2 Aux Reference If H3 09z2 then the Al analog input will be used regardless of
162. del numbers codes for the enclosure type V NEMAI Note 3 Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure Drive heat sink losses are included in the heat loss data Note 4 Height dimension H excludes the mounting screw tabs Depth dimension D excludes the disconnect handle Note 5 This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options Weight could be less depending on the options specified Note 6 All standard options are available in this size enclosure Bypass Unit Enclosures All Bypass units are intended for non hazardous locations Various enclosure types are provided to protect against the applica tion environmental conditions B NEMA 1 Enclosures These are constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection against incidental contact with enclosed electrical equip ment and falling dust or dirt efesotomasyon com Physical Installation 1 4 Confirmations upon Delivery Receiving Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive and Bypass unit is delivered Table 1 4 Checks Item Method Has the correct model of Bypass unit been Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Bypass unit delivered Reconcile with packing slip and or order information Inspect the entire exterior of the Bypass unit to see if there are any dents scr
163. describes a quick and systemic approach in troubleshooting of an E7N Bypass panel and PCB A2 The only addi tional testing device needed will be a DVM to verify the PCB A2 interactions and connections to other devices in the E7N Bypass panel The bypass control card PCB A2 provides the capability to test and monitor all the panel Drive user and option wiring efficiently Thus a bad control card can be detected and replaced or eliminated from consideration very rapidly Before starting the procedure below follow routine troubleshooting tests around the offending section to detect possibly faulty components For example if a contactor 15 not picking up or a blower is not running measure the voltage across the device If the Drive is not working properly check the keypad and verify that the Drive does not have an internal fault external faults might be caused by bypass system and will be resolved later in this section If the problem is more complex such as a Bypass not responding or the interaction between the PCB A2 and the Drive is not normal then the procedure in this section will help resolve the issue Specifications Inputs e pins 1 6 6 x 24VDC 15 or 120VAC 15 4mA Auto Detect e CN104 pins 2 5 4 x 120 15 4mA e CN109 pin 5 1 x 120 15 4mA e CNIIO pins 21 26 6 3VDC 5 5VDC 2 7 5mA e CN102 pins 2 3 30 32 34 5 x 15 27VDC 4 2 7 5mA e CNII3 pins 2 13 12 x 3 5VDC 2mA 1 6 7 8 In
164. e This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive and Bypass unit Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance 2 E TIT 2 Preventive Maintenance 3 Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement 4 Maintenance 1 E N Maintenance Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive and Bypass or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Drive and Bypass specification of 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F The output current value shown in parameter U1 03 should not be higher than the motor rated current for an extended period of time The cooling fan in the Drive and Bypass should be operating normally Always turn OFF the input power before beginning inspection Confirm that the digital operator and indicator lights on the front panel have all turned OFF and then wait an additional five minutes before beginning the inspection Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Please refer to Warnings on page 1 Table 7 1 Per
165. e Flashing Description Option Communication Error After initial communication was established the connection was lost Serial communication transmission error Communication has not yet been estab lished Both the forward and the reverse run com mands are input simultaneously for 500mS or more This alarm stops the motor Communication Option Card External Fault External Fault at Terminal S3 External Fault at Terminal S4 External Fault at Terminal S5 External Fault at Terminal S6 External Fault at Terminal S7 The Drive does not have the enable com mand when the run command is applied Cause Connection 1s broken master has stopped communicating Connection not made properly user software not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration An external forward and reverse command are input simultaneously An external fault condition exists An external fault condition exists connected to a multi function digital input The Run command has been applied prior to the enable signal Corrective Action Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Check external sequence logic Check for an external condition Verify the parameters Verify communication signal Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition Remove the fault from a multi function digital input Apply the e
166. e Elapsed Timer back to zero set o2 07 0 Programming 5 76 02 10 Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Setting Range 0 to 65535 Hours Factory Default 0 Hours The elapsed time of heatsink cooling fan operation is tracked by the U1 40 monitor Much like the 02 07 parameter can be used to adjust or reset the Drive operation elapsed timer parameter 02 10 can be used to adjust the time displayed by the U1 40 monitor in the event of fan replacement B 02 12 Fault Trace Fault History Clear Function Seting 0 Disabled No Effect factory default Enabled The operator can clear the Fault Trace U2 and Fault History logs by setting 2 12 1 Enabled Clearing the Fault Trace and Fault History logs erases all the information B 02 14 kWh User Monitor Initialization Seting 0 Disabled No Change factory default Clear The kWh monitors U1 29 and U1 30 track the power usage of the Drive and are not reset by powering down the Drive To reset the monitors back to zero set o2 14 1 Clear all Programming 5 77 03 Digital Operator Copy Function B 03 01 Copy Function Selection The membrane over the Drive keypad also makes the keypad non removable on Bypass units In order to use the keypad copy function on a Bypass unit order a separate keypad part number CDR001115 and obtain locally a standard CAT 5 Ethernet cable Note The copy function 15 disabled when serial communicati
167. e H3 09 2 and ensure that H3 13 1 all other parameters per line 2 of Table 5 2 For an E7N with serial communications as in lines 4 5 and 6 of Table 5 2 change b1 01 1 H3 09 2 and H3 13 0 all other parameters per line 4 5 or 6 of Table 5 2 B Options None Bypass with no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 4 20 mA applied to Terminal TB3 3 Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 1 Terminals default Speed command source Terminals H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch H3 09 0 Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal Al input Terminal A1 is not used therefore the 2 bias signal becomes the speed command H1 03 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1 02 keypad as a preset speed default This input contact is closed when H O A Hand Options None Bypass with no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3 3 Drive terminal 2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b
168. e Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 360 0 Seconds Factory Default 5 0 Seconds Programming 5 29 The Integral factor of PI functionality is a time based gain that be used to eliminate the error difference between the setpoint and feedback at steady state The smaller the Integral Time set into b5 03 the more aggressive the Integral factor will be To turn off the Integral Time set b5 03 0 00 fa O 3 5 Setpoint 2 Setpoint Zero Offset offset with Integral Action Feedback Feedback No Integral With Integral Fig 5 16 PID Feedback Response Characteristics B 65 04 Integral Limit Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 On some applications especially those with rapidly varying loads the output of the PI function may have large oscillations To suppress these oscillations a limit can be applied to the integral factor by programming b5 04 B b5 06 Output Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 Places a cap on the output of the PI function Limiting the PI function may help to prevent large overshoots in the Drive s response to error the difference between the setpoint and the feedback B b5 07 PI Offset Adjustment Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depe
169. e input power to within specifications Extend the time in C1 02 Remove the power factor correction capacitors High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 DC Bus Overvoltage 08 240VAC Tri int is gt 400Vd The deceleration time 15 set DC Bus Overvolt HD DOM 5 too short 480VAC Trip point is gt 800Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive Open phase on the input of the Drive Loose terminal screws at R LL S L2 or T L3 Tighten the terminal screws Input Phase Loss PF ji Check the input voltage Input Pha Loss Drive input power supply has an open phase occurred or has a large imbalance of input voltage Input voltage fluctuation too lise Check the input voltage Adjust L8 06 according to your application The higher the value the less sensitive it becomes Parameter L8 06 value is set incorrectly Remove power from the Drive Disconnect the motor Perform the checks without DC Bus Fuse Shorted output transistor s or power in Table 6 6 DC Bus Fuse Open Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened terminals Replace the shorted component s Replace the defective fuse Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 11 Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Verify dynamic braking duty Dynamic Braking Resis
170. e negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Input Diodes D1 D12 or Q1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 25 Table 6 8 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued 11 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is OL displayed Input Diodes 12 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 D1 D12 or Q1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is OL displayed 13 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is OL displayed The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive 1 Conduct a visual
171. e the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading 1s OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading 15 OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading 1s about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading 1s about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U T1 Expected reading 15 OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is OL displayed All Drives have a Control Power Fuse The fuse is located on eithe
172. e time specified by b2 04 0 0 Default to establish the end point of the ramp DC injection can be used to insure the motor is at zero rpm prior to the Drive shutting off ON CLOSED Run Command OFF OPEN 100 Output Frequency Deceleration Time 1 02 DC Injection Brake 0 i TIME 6 b2 04_ Fig 5 2 Deceleration to Stop The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula Output Freq at time of stop command Time to Stop x Setting of active Decel Time 02 or C1 04 Maximum Frequency El 04 If S Curve characteristics are specified by the Drive programming they will add to the total time to stop 1 Coastto stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast uncontrolled deceleration The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the sys tem and the rotation will stop ON CLOSED Run Command 100 7 Motor Speed N Output Frequency 4 Drive Output Frequency Interrupted N 0 Fig 5 3 Coast to Stop IMPORTANT After a is inmates a subsequent Run commands input before the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 has expired will be ignored Programming 5 14 2 DCInj to Stop When the Run command is removed the Drive will Baseblock turn off its output for the Minimum Base block Time
173. e underscore position in these model numbers codes for the enclosure type 41 43 8 38 11 5 E7U20151 E7N_D059 E7U20181 EN 074 Note 1 Horsepower rating 15 based on a standard NEMA B 4 pole motor Note 3 Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure Drive heat sink losses are included in the heat loss data Note 4 Height dimension H excludes the mounting screw tabs Depth dimension D excludes the disconnect handle Note 5 This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options Weight could be less depending on the options specified Note 6 standard options are available in this size enclosure Physical Installation 1 3 Table 1 3 480V Enclosure Data Bypass Enclosure Dimensions Weight Electrical Volts Model FLA NEMA 1 of Number W D Assembly inches T 1 6 2 1 3 4 4 7 6 7 2 2 f 3 4 E7U42P21 E7N B001 41 43 E7U43P71 B007 7045 51 E7N 011 DS E7N 01 7047 51 E7N 014 ETN 001 7040111 E7N 027 7040151 E7N B034 E7U40181 E7N B040 52 38 15 43 14 25 150 Ibs 8 s Ero 065 Note 1 Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4 pole motor 1 16 a mem mm a mme 34 Ls mme 480 50 Note 2 The underscore position in these mo
174. e v Humidity Environment Dust General Harmful Gas Oil Mist AH AC Power Supply Main circuit amp control voltage Loose lugs screws amp wires Hot spots on parts Corrosion Bent conductors Breakage cracking or discoloration Check spacing Transformers amp Reactors Discoloration or Noise AC Power Circuit amp Blocks Loose damaged Devices Leakage Ruptures broken expansion Capacitance amp insulation resistance Noisy Relays amp Contactors Contact discoloration Cracked Soft Charge Resistors Discoloration Speed reference voltage current Control Circuits Operation I O contact operation Relay logic Abnormal fan noise Cooling System Cooling Fans Fins amp Heatsink Loose connectors Free of accumulation SASS SIS Conductors amp Wire Connections v DC Bus Capacitors LEDs Monitor display values Key and selector switch functionality Clean Keypad Front Panel Digital Operator and Display Front Panel mM If the Drive is used under the following conditions it may be necessary to inspect more often e High ambient temperatures humidity or altitudes above 3 300 feet e Frequent starting and stopping e Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load e Excessive vibration and or shock loading e Poor environment including dust metal particles salt sulfuric acid chlorine Maintenance 7 3 Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement Drive Models
175. e voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power AWARNING Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed to describe details These must be replaced before operation Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit cards to prevent ESD damage The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power Clear all personnel from the Drive motor and machine area before applying power Secure covers couplings shaft keys and machine loads before energizing the Drive and Bypass unit Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual E Intended Use Drives and Bypass Units are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery For use in the European Union the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 1997 10 Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices EN 60201 1 1997 12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements IEC 60204 1 1997 EN 61010 1997 11Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment 950 1991 1 1992 2 1993 3 1995 A4 1996 modified Other The Drive and Bypass unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of d
176. eat Fault Operation Selection Mtr OH Fault Sel L1 04 Motor Temperature Input Filter Time Mtr Temp Filter L1 05 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection L2 01 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time PwrL Ridethru t L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Mini mum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V F Ramp t L2 04 Undervoltage Detection Level PUV Det Level L2 05 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Enables or disables the motor thermal overload protection 0 Disabled 1 Std Fan Cooled Enabled 2 Std Blower Cooled 3 Vector Motor Determines how much time will elapse prior to a motor overload fault OL1 when motor amps exceed the value set in parameter E2 01 by 10 Actual OL1 trip time will vary depending on severity of overload Operation selection when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH3 alarm level 1 17V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Stopping method when the motor temperature analog input H3 09 E exceeds the OH4 level 2 34V 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Delay Time applied to motor temperature analog input H3 09 E for filtering purposes PwrLoss Ridethru Enables and disables the momentary power loss function 0 Disabled Drive trips on UV1 fault when power is lost 1 PwrL Ride Thru t Drive will restart if power
177. ecelerate from maximum frequency to zero Quick Setting C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when 6000 0 30 0sec Mcd Accel Time 2 selected via a multi function input 04 Deceleration Time 2 Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when 30 0sec p Decel Time 2 selected via a multi function input 5 0 0 Fast Stop Time Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for to ER Fast Stop Time the Fast Stop function 6000 0 Programming Accel Decel Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel decel times 1 11 Swich Fout lt 1 11 Accel Decel Time 2 0 0 to 0 0Hz CODO Fout gt 1 11 Accel Decel Time 1 200 0 4 Multi function input Multi Acc Dec 1 has priority over 1 11 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Menu location is Programming when PI is disabled and Quick Setting when PI is enabled b5 28 Function Selection b5 30 b5 31 gt Parameters 7 Table 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter M CM Setting Factory Menu p Range Setting Location S Curve Acc Dec S curve is used to further soften the starting ramp The longer the S curve time the softer the starting S Curve Characteristic at 0 00 t Accel Start P 2 a 0 20sec Programming SCrv Acc Start command OFF Output
178. ect the series circuit of Normally Closed NC safety devices such as freeze up thermostats smoke fire sensors high pressure limits temperature limits or vibration detectors On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System Status area of the front control panel if a nor mally closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation 1 of 3 items needs to be done before the motor can be started 1 Install a NC Safety Circuit between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on 2 This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be added later in the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch 52 7 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system Building Automation System Interlock Circuit Drive and Bypass enable input A control terminal block position TB1 terminals 3 and 9 is provided to connect Normally Open NO enabling contacts such as damper end switches or occupied cycle timers Electrical Installation 2 10 When a Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode the E7N will display a red Damper BAS LED in the System Status area of the front control panel This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation 1 of 3 items ne
179. ed Start Up and Operation 4 12 iSafety Interlock Circuit A Control terminal block position TB1 1 is provided to connect the series circuit of Normally Closed NC safety devices such as freeze up thermostats smoke fire sensors high pressure limits temperature limits or vibration detectors Anytime all the safety device contacts are closed the Drive or Bypass will operate When any one of these contacts open the Drive or Bypass will immediately stop operating This input is momentary when a safety device contact re closes the Drive or Bypass will return to operation On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System Status area of the front control panel if a normally closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start up 1 Install a NC Safety Circuit between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on 2 This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be added later in the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2 7 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system iBuilding Automation System Interlock Circuit This is a Drive and Bypass enable input A control ter
180. ed commands when the commanded speed rises above the upper end of the dead band for increasing references Similarly the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just above the dead band and only accept lower speed commands when the command speed falls below the lower end of the dead band for decreasing references 9 E To o O lt User Speed Command Input Fig 5 22 Jump Frequency Characteristics Setting the center point of the dead band with the d3 01 through d3 03 parameters and setting the width of the dead band with parameter d3 04 determines the dead band characteristics The programmer can set up to three Jump Frequencies If multiple Jump Frequencies are programmed the following rule applies d3 01 lt d3 02 lt d3 03 Programming 5 42 d4 Sequence B 04 01 MOP Reference Memory Setting Description 0 Disabled factory default Enabled The Drive offers the capacity to change the speed command much the way a Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP would Using programmed digital inputs configured as MOP Increase H1 0x 10 and MOP Decrease H1 0x 11 the Drive will increase the speed command whenever the MOP Increase input is closed and decrease the speed command whenever the MOP Decrease is closed The speed command will remain constant whenever both inputs are open or closed Parameter d4 01 determines whether the last speed command before the Run command was removed
181. ed even if the P1 function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled Output Upper Limit d2 01 SIGSD SVE Rt cuu 05 15 Speed Command Fig 5 18 Sleep Function Response Programming 5 32 B b5 17 Accel Decel Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default 0 0 Seconds This is a soft start function that 15 applied to the PI setpoint analog input Instead of having nearly instantaneous changes in signal levels there is a programmed ramp applied to level changes When changing setpoints the error can be limited by gradually ramping the setpoint through the use of parameter b5 17 b5 18 PI Setpoint Selection Seting 0 Disabled factory default Enabled In order to use parameter b5 19 as the PI Setpoint set parameter b5 18 1 Enabled If b5 18 0 Disabled the PI Setpoint will either be e Modbus Register 06H If Register OFH bit 1 is high e The active speed command 1 Determined by the setting of b1 01 See Table 5 7 Setpoint Options 65 19 PI Setpoint Value Setting Range 0 00 to 100 00 Factory Default 0 00 Parameter b5 19 is for a PI Setpoint value When b5 18 1 Enabled the value of b5 19 will take precedent over any other PI setpoint unless the Drive is set up for Differential Feedback in which case b5 18 and b5 19 have no affect on the PI function B b5 20 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Sating The
182. ed via the local control panel while the motor is operating in Bypass mode Normal Control Panel Indicators Auto Run LED Ready LED E7 ss Green indicates no 2 Green with Auto Mode amp Auto Start Control Power LED Green with Power Applied Drive Select LED Green in Drive Mode Run LED Green indicates Run Command Auto LED Green in Auto Mode omoke Purge LED Amber when Smoke Purge activated Auto Transfer LED Amber in Auto X fer to Bypass Mode Amber in Remote X fer to Bypass Mode Drive Test LED Amber in Drive Test Mode HAND LED Amber in Hand Mode OFF LED Amber in Off Mode Bypass Select LED Amber in Bypass Mode amp Run Control Panel 3 9 Fault Control Panel Indicators Safety Open LED Red when Customer Safety is open 5 LED Red when Damper Circuit or BAS open Fault LED Red when Drive is faulted Motor O L LED Red when Thermal Overload is tripped Control Panel 3 10 Drive Main Menus The Drive s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set parameters The Drive is equipped with five menus The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3 18 and are directly available by pressing the MENU key Table 3 18 Drive Main Menus The Drive can be run in this menu Also calle
183. ed with a digital mutli meter 230 240VAC Cooling Fans Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Heat Sink Measure across the fan motor terminals If the fan motor 1s good the measured value should be about 500 ohms If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor 1s shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 230 240 VAC to the fan to test the motor Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse It is located on either the Gate Drive Board 3PCB or the Tap Change Board 8PCB If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open then the 230 240VAC cooling fans may be defective 1 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Cooling Fan Fuse 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse 15 good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 28 Drive Date Stamp Information This information 15 used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it 1s within its warranty period The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive Fig 6 2 Date Stamp Location PRON 00722 4 Manufacture Date m Inspector Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 29 Notes Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 30 Chapter 7 Maintenanc
184. eds to be done before the motor can be started 1 Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on PCB 2 This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will be added later in the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch 52 8 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 11 Analog Inputs The Drive has two analog input terminals for use as auto mode speed command terminals Al amp A2 and feedback terminal A2 input Table 2 7 Drive Analog Input Terminals Signal Level 1 0 to 10 VDC 2 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 10 VDC programmable via parameter H3 08 and DIP switch S1 2 B Control Circuit Analog Input Terminals 2 All control inputs are landed on TB1 through 5 on PCB 2 TB3 3 15 an analog input terminal and may be connected to either Drive terminal Al or Drive Terminal A2 to maximize input flexibility using DIP switches 51 3 and S1 4 The factory default is TB3 3 connected to Drive terminal A2 With this connection the input signal level can be either 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA The signal level selection is controlled by DIP switch S1 2 and Drive parameter H3 08 5 9 is also an analog input terminal it is always connected to Drive terminal 2
185. ee Level WEE multi function outputs H2 01and H2 02 as a setpoint 5 ce and hysteresis for contact closure L4 02 Spd Agree Width y 0 0 to 20 0 2 0Hz Programming Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost Frequency Reference Loss 0 Stop Disabled Drive will not run at the fre L4 05 Detection Selection quency reference 0 or 1 Programming Ref Loss Sel 1 Enabled of PrevRef Drive will run at a percentage L4 06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost If Frequency Reference loss function is enabled L4 05 1 and Frequency Reference is lost then the L4 06 Loss Frequency d 0 to 100 0 80 0 Programming Fref at Floss drive will run at reduced frequency reference deter mined by 14 06 New Fref at time of loss x L4 06 po Fault Restart EE L5 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Determines the number of times the drive will perform 0 to 10 Quick Setting Num of Restarts an automatic restart Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt L5 02 Auto Restart Operation Selection 0 No FIt Relay fault contact will not activate during an 0 Restart Sel automatic restart one Programming 1 Flt Relay Active fault contact will activate during an automatic restart Maximum Restart Time After If the restart fails or is not attempted due to a L5 03 Fault continuing fault condition e g an OV
186. efesofomasyon com Mi 1 Am umet Y YASKAWA Drive Bypass Technical Manual un i gt I i j 4 NDA j Model E7N Document Number TM E7N 01 efesotomasyon com Quick Reference for Bypass Parameters Parameter Factory Parameter Factory Parameter Factory Parameter Factory Number Setting Number Setting Number Setting Number Setting b5 13 t a 05 14 3 05 05 16 b5 17 L4 01 L4 02 L4 05 E2 05 kVA Dep 3 L6 01 L6 02 H1 03 See 4 p p p p p p p NENNEN LS p p p p p po p p 5o __ beo kvADep os 586 _ _ p p p u 20 p p po Ls p p p p po p E p p 2 ay p M C NENNEN ERE p po p NEM 7 O E 71 _ T 3 ENSE __ ___ ___ H3 08 See Table ZEN E E SS p EE ERN p Ls O p po 7 oj NN po NEN p 2 0 0 Lo oo o o 08 b1 01 See TableO 0 b1 02 cro w b1 03 7 80 KVA D
187. elivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 240 Vac maximum 240 V Class and 480 Vac maximum 480 V Class only when option D Fused Disconnect is specified The above statement remains valid when option B is specified however the statement becomes invalid if option is spec ified This manual is for reference only and subject to change without notice Introduction This Section describes the applicability of the Manual Product Description The E7N Bypass unit provides a means of bypassing the Drive while allowing the motor to operate at full speed directly from the AC line It incorporates an AC Drive and two contactor Bypass arrangement in a single UL listed enclosure The two electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive from the load when operating in Bypass mode Control logic provides industry standard Hand Off Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks in both drive and Bypass operating modes E7N Bypass components include a fused 120 VAC control circuit transformer an input disconnect motor overload relay control keypad and indicating lights The E7 Drive a component of the E7N Bypass package is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for 3 Phase AC induction motors This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive AC Drive AFD ASD VFD and Inverter In this manual the E7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive The Drive is a varia
188. en L4 05 1 Enabled of PrevRef Programming 5 64 L5 Fault Restart 5 01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts Setting Range 01010 Factory Default 10 5 02 Auto Restart Operation Selection Seting Lo 7 No Relay factory default Flt Relay Active E 5 03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault Setting Range 0 5 to 600 0 Seconds Factory Default 600 0 Seconds All major faults will cause the Drive to stop For some faults it is possible to configure the Drive to attempt a restart automatically After the fault occurs the Drive baseblocks for L2 03 seconds After the baseblock is removed the Drive checks if a fault condition still exists If no fault condition exists the Drive will attempt to restart the motor If the restart 15 successful the Drive performs a Speed Search Regardless of the status of b3 01 Speed Search Selection from the set speed command and the Auto Restart Attempts count is increased by one Even if the restart fails the restart count is increased by as long as the Drive attempted to rotate the motor The restart count will not be incremented if the restart 1s not attempted due to a continuing fault condition 1 e an OV fault The Drive waits L5 03 seconds before attempting another restart Run l OV ioc Fault trying each 15 03 seconds 2 try Poet Attempts Count TIME Voltage Drive trips on OC condition remains high res
189. ency before power loss eceleration z time set in b3 03 b3 02 speed search operating current Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency D si immediately before baseblock Minimum baseblock time L2 03 eps 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 o Fig 5 11 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss Set frequency eceleration time set in b3 03 reference Output frequency b3 02 Speed search operating time Output current 4 gt ie Speed search wait time b3 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 5 12 Speed Search Current Detection Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time Setting of Automatic Speed Search for Automatic Speed Search after Speed Search Used for b3 01 all RUN commands momentary power loss and Run with programmed baseblock multi function input No Yes Speed Estimation Yes Speed Estimation Yes Speed Estimation Yes Speed Estimation Yes Speed Estimation Yes Current Detection Yes Current Detection Yes Current Detection Yes Current Detection Yes Current Detection Programming 5 2
190. ep 0 9 9 41 b2 01 0 5 0 2 9 5 9 C oo NC Cea o 100 100 200 0 02 02 5 02 03 100 02 04 02 09 03 01 03 02 1 03 03 2 0 Dep 2 20 H5 07 See Table O 2 d3 03 2 5 DM b3 05 0 1 03 14 04 01 4 02 1 01 208 240 480 1 8 1 5 i 0 1 7 20 30 1 30 30 H3 09 See Table 0 30 1 10 0 2 3 0 2 0 F 1 1 10 0 H5 08 See Table 0 5 IVA Dep 0 2 2 1 120 1 1 120 2 10 10 15 10 4 1 300 45 1 1 20 1 1 5 150 1 40 1 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 H5 02 See Table 0 58 3 1 5 1 3 1 p p p p p p pr pu p E p p p p po p p p p LE p p p p p NEN o RENI p p p pu Lo p p __ as ____ p E EE ee es ee a p pop __ pup pe MER MEN NEN KVADep p Warnings Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product that if not heeded may result in personal injury fatality or equipment damage Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions AWARNING YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications The selection and application of YAS
191. erminals S1 through and including S5 are consumed by the needs of the bypass logic circuit The programming of these terminal functions is essential to the operation of the Drive and Bypass unit and is described in Tables 5 1 and 5 2 Programming 5 2 Only Drive terminals Al 2 56 57 and SN are available for other uses They have been brought out to terminals on the E7N PCB A2 Drive Terminals Correspondence to E7N Terminals Drive E7N PCB A2 Drive Function E7N PCB A2 Terminal Terminal Selection Parameter DIP Switch TB3 3 b1 01 S1 3 S1 4 Table 5 1 through Table 5 4 and the accompanying paragraphs explain the programming of the Drive for the E7N Bypass application including these virtual terminals Programming 5 3 Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters The basic Drive programming for a Bypass unit is different from that of a Drive installation without the Bypass option Several Drive parameters have been programmed at the factory to meet the needs of the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 below the highlighted parameters are required by the Bypass logic circuit Only those parameters that are changed from the Drive default are listed Table 5 1 Bypass Parameter Settings _ ____ a a a a PARAMETER OPTIONAL LCD NUMBER UNITS DESCRIPTION KEYPAD DISPLAY Default For Bypass Setting b1 01 SEE 1 N A Frequency Reference Selection Selects the speed Reference Source b1 08 1 Run Command Selection During Programming
192. erse 0 Forward Bits 2 and 3 Not used Bit 4 External error 1 Fault set using H1 01 0001H Bit 5 Error Fault 1 Reset command set using H1 02 Not used Multi function digital input terminal 55 input Bits 6 to B Bit C Bit D Bit E Multi function digital input terminal S6 input Multi function digital input terminal S7 input Bit F Not used 0002H Frequency reference 30000 100 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously B Enter Command When writing parameters to the Drive from the PLC using Modbus communication the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive To enable these parameters in the parameter data area use the Enter command There are two types of Enter commands 1 Enter commands that enable parameter data in RAM 2 Enter commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM The following table shows the Enter command data Enter command data can only be written The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Table D 7 Enter Command Register No 0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM 0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100 000 Do not frequently execute Enter commands 0900H written to EEPROM The Enter command registe
193. eter 25 User Param 25 User Parameter 26 User Param 26 User Parameter 27 User Param 27 User Parameter 28 User Param 28 User Parameter 29 User Param 29 User Parameter 30 User Param 30 User Parameter 31 User Param 31 User Parameter 32 User Param 32 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level 1 01 1 These are the only parameters accessible for the user level These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function Parameters A 3 Setting Range b1 01 to 03 02 Factory Setting Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Parameter No b1 01 b1 02 51 03 51 04 51 07 51 08 51 11 1 12 51 13 b1 14 Emergency Override Speed Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when 0 00 to E Override Speed b1 15 0 120 00 Hz b1 15 b2 01 b2 02 b2 03 b2 04 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Run Command Selection Run Source Stopping M
194. ethod Selection Stopping Method Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Local Remote Run Selection LOC REM RUN Sel Run Command Selection During Program RUN CMD at PRG Hand Frequency Reference Selection HAND Fref Source HAND AUTO During Run Selection HAND AUTO Run Emergency Override Reference Selection E OverrideRefSel DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current DC Injection Braking Time at Start DCInj Time Start DC Injection Braking Time at Stop DCInj Time Stop Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Sequence Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the run command input source 0 Operator Hand and Off keys on digital operator Terminals Contact Closure on Terminal S1 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast w Timer A new run command is ignored if input before the time in C1 02 expires Determines the forward rotation of the motor and if reverse operation is disabled 0 Reverse Ena
195. ets 2 andtries gone resets 3 for a long time again but motor still and runs then reset 1 shorted trips again and run Fig 5 35 Automatic Restart Timing Diagram The auto restart count is reset back to 0 if any of the following occur e No further faults for ten minutes after the last retry Drives power is turned off the Drive must be without power long enough to let control power dissipate e SHIFT RESET key is pushed after the last reset attempt Programming 5 65 The setting of parameter L5 02 determines whether the fault output will be closed during an auto restart attempt The setting of L5 02 can be important when interfacing the Drive with other equipment The following faults will allow the Auto Restart function to initiate e OC Overcurrent e Output Open Phase e Input Phase Loss e DC Bus Fuse e _ OLI Motor Overload e OL3 Overtorque e OL2 Drive Overload e OV DC Bus Overvoltage e Ground Fault e UVI DC Bus Undervoltage e 1 Overheat In order for auto restart after a UV fault Momentary Power Loss Ride thru must be enabled L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t or 2 CPU Power Active Setting H2 01 or H2 02 equal to configures a digital output as Restart Enabled to signal if an impending auto restart is possible Programming 5 66 L6 Torque Detection 6 01 Torque Detection Selection 1 wagonga OO
196. evention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Level During Accel StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Selection During Decel StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Run StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level Table A 1 Parameter List Continued T Setting 0 Disabled Motor accelerates at active acceleration 01 or C1 03 The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short 1 General Purpose When output current exceeds L3 02 level acceleration stops It starts to accelerate at current value recovery 2 Intelligent The active acceleration rate C1 01 or C1 02 is ignored Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time w o exceeding the current value set in L3 02 This function is enabled when L3 01 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is 100 Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting 0 Disabled The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate C1 02 or C1 04 If the load 15 too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate C1 02 or C1 04 but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the output frequency will clamp Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored a
197. ey the cycling of the LEDs should be interrupted for as long as any of the switches is pressed This will test the entire keypad and its cable connections Independent from the sequential cycling the LEDs will blink if the associated inputs are activated If an LED is blinking due to a specific input activation it will be lit for 2 seconds at its turn in the sequence then resume blinking This enables monitor ing of every input to the system regardless of its origin drive user panel or options Table 6 1 Relation Between Digital Inputs and H O A Control Keypad LEDs in Maintenance Mode Assigned Function Drive COMM On Board MCUNVRAN Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 3 Four inputs are excluded from this process they do not cause LEDs to blink They have LEDs the keypad that monitor the status independently Motor Overload Relay input at CN109 5 User Safety Interlock input at TB1 1 Drive Fault Relay input at CN102 2 Drive Run Relay input at CN102 3 If testing of the Drive digital outputs 1s required these two outputs can be set to a normally active function on the Drive key pad H2 01 or H2 02 set to 1 Zero Speed or 6 Ready for example in order to be monitored on the bypass H O A keypad Table 6 2 Troubleshooting the E7N Panel Drive ON Bypass dead Check the fuse F101 Verify the power to PCB LEDs Test the user side wiring circuitry If it is OK test the control PCB Check J1 52
198. forward run command 15 input Also lit when the Drive is in Hand Mode R D B Drive REMOTE Sequence SEQ and REMOTE Reference REF indicators The Bypass operates differently than a stand alone Drive with regard to these two indicators The Bypass control logic interfaces with the Drive via terminals that would be used a Drive only installation for the REMOTE Sequence Run Command and REMOTE Reference Speed Command Since these terminals are active and the appropriate parameters configured for the Bypass unit operation see Tables 5 1 and 5 2 the REMOTE Sequence and REMOTE Reference LED s will be lit even when the H O A HAND button is pressed local control providing both the run and speed command from the local control panel The control signals are Local to the Drive and Bypass unit but Remote from the Drive itself An exception to this rule occurs for the REMOTE REF indicator when serial communication is employed See Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Drive REMOTE Sequence SEQ and REMOTE Reference REF Indicators Analog Input Serial COM Input Control Panel 3 4 B Drive Run Indicator The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3 4 when the Drive is either in the Hand or mode Table 3 4 RUN Indicator Blinking Red Drive is decelerating to a stop Drive Stop Indicator The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3 5 when the Drive is either in
199. forward run command has been set at a speed command of 60 0 Hz in the slave 1 Drive by the PLC Response Message Response Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address Slave Address Fonon Code 30 _ 90H Star Address d Command Message Slave Address Address No of data Lower 01 Higher 00H No of data 2 x quantity Fig D 9 Function Code 10H Message Example Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle IMPORTANT response messages in the same way Communications D 9 Modbus Data Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data and broadcast data B Reference Data The reference data table is shown below Reference data can be read and written to Table D 4 Reference Data Register 0000H Reserved Frequency reference Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit Forward reverse operation 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bit 2 External fault 1 Fault EFO Bit 3 Fault reset 1 Reset command Bit 4 ComNet 0001H ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function digital input command 3 Multi function digital input command 4 Fault contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bree dai ermina 56 input Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do not write data to reserved registers Communications D 10 B Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Moni
200. frequency S Curve Characteristic at Accel End 0 00 to 2 50 0 20sec Programming SCrv Acc End 22427 Torque Comp This parameter helps to produce better starting torque It Torque Compensation Gain determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon 0 00 to 2 50 1 00 Programming Torq Comp Gain motor current and motor resistance Torque Compensation This parameter adjusts a filter on the output of the torque 4 02 Primary Delay Time compensation function Increase to add torque stability decrease 0 to 10000 200ms Piostamming Torq Comp Time to improve torque response BEEN Carrier Freq Normal Duty Selection 1 Normal Duty 1 ula Normal Duty Sel Normal C2 01 C2 02 l 4 01 Carrier frequency sets the number of pulses per second of out put voltage waveform 0 Low Noise Carrier frequency is randomly moduled for lower audible noise 2 0 kHz C6 02 2 5 0 kHz 0 to F MP t Programming Fc 8 0 kHz P 10 0 kHz Fe 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 Carrier Frequency Upper C6 03 Limit Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F E Programming kHz Dependent CarrierFreq Max Carrier Frequency Lower C6 04 Limit Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F kya Programming 4 kHz Dependent CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency Propor C6
201. front control panel has a digital alpha numeric display and keypad in the upper portion for Drive operation and program ming The row of LEDs above the alpha numeric display indicate Drive operational status The REMOTE SEQ and REF LEDs in this row are always lit in most Bypass unit applications of the E7 Drive See Chapter 3 for an explanation The row of LEDs below the alpha numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active The lower portion of the front control panel displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND OFF AUTO functions for both the Drive and Bypass The general rule for LED colors in the lower portion of the control panel is Green Normal Status Amber Abnormal Status Red Fault Status 1 Before applying power make sure that the following conditions are met terminal unit dampers in supply fan applications are open to prevent duct flexing or damage in a full speed across the line starting situation e electro mechanical motor OverLoad Relay OLR S10 is adjusted to equal the Full Load Amps FLA value from the motor nameplate The OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the Bypass contactor See Figure 4 1 Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit the adjustable thermal OLR provides overload protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes The OLR is set up in the facto
202. g Fan On Run Mode factory default Fan Always On Programming 5 69 B 18 11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 300 Seconds Factory Default 300 Seconds Parameters L8 10 and L8 11 allow the Drive programmer to customize the heatsink cooling fan operation Parameter L8 10 determines whether the cooling fans are always ON whenever the Drive is powered L8 10 1 Fan Always or if the cooling fans are only ON when the Drive is in a Run condition L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode Parameter L8 11 is a delayed OFF for the cooling fan 1f L8 10 0 Fan On Run Mode When the cooling fans set to turn OFF when the Run command is removed parameter L8 11 will cause the fans to continue cooling the Drive for the amount of time programmed into L8 11 after the Run command 1s actually removed The Drive can be programmed to allow the cooling fan to run for up to 5 minutes factory default after the run command is removed Both parameters are intended to extend fan life while still providing sufficient cooling for proper Drive operation Run ON CLOSED Command OFF OPEN ON CLOSED TIME OFF OPEN 4 1 Fig 5 38 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Timing Diagram 8 19 Overheat Frequency Reference Reduction Level Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of maximum frequency Factory Default 20 096 of maximum frequency When the heatsink temperature reaches the OH Pre alarm level
203. gn practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems Table 2 1 Motor Cable Length vs Carrier Frequency C6 02 Motor Cable Length 164 ft 50 maximum 328 ft 100m maximum More than 328 ft 100m See the limitations on carrier frequency based on Drive capacity and model number in Appendix B Electrical Installation 2 4 Grounding B Drive and Motor Ground Wire Landing The Drive ground lug terminal is connected to the enclosure The enclosure ground lug must be connected to earth ground See Figure 2 1 The Drive has a second ground lug to accept the motor ground lead B Ground Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire 1 208 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 Q 2 480 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 10 Q 3 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as large current electrical equipment 4 Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Drive Therefore if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable 5 When using more than one Drive be careful not to loop the ground wire OK NO 10 1e 1
204. gured as a Fault Reset H1 0x 14 B Function PI Disable Setting 19 When the PI Function has been enabled by b5 01 PI Mode Selection it can be indefinitely disabled by closing a digital input configured as a PI Disable input 1 0 19 When disabled the Drive operates as a standard Drive that does not have PI enabled B Function Com Inv Sel 2 Setting 6C The Com Inv Selection function allows the user to switch the origin of the Run and speed command between the Drive s terminals and the RS 485 422 port and the embedded communication protocols on the removable terminal board When a digital input is programmed for Com Inv Selection function H1 0x 6B that input will function as follows Programming 5 51 Table 5 12 Option Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source OPEN From the control circuit and analog input terminals CLOSED From Serial Com port R R S and S embedded protocols To switch the command source between the serial communication port and the control circuit terminals be sure to program the following parameters e Set b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection to 1 Terminals e Set b1 02 Run Command Selection to 1 Terminals e Set H1 0x Input Terminal Function Selection to 6B or 6C Com Inv Sel 2 function will operate the same way except the logic 1s reversed When a digital input is programmed for the Selection function H1 0x that input will function
205. hat should be used for open loop or closed loop control It is also possible to have the sleep function start level b5 15 compared to the Drive input or setpoint For this special application set b5 21 1 PI Setpoint When b5 21 2 Snooze a variation of the sleep function called Snooze is enabled see parameter b5 22 to b5 27 IMPORTANT The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled b5 01 0 Disabled Programming 5 34 B b5 22 PI Snooze Level Setting Range 0 100 Factory Default 0 B b5 23 Snooze Delay Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds B b5 24 PI Snooze Deactivation Level Setting Range 0 100 Factory Default 0 The Snooze Function 15 a variation on the Sleep Function The Snooze function must be selected by setting parameter b5 21 2 Snooze Once the Snooze Function is selected the Drive monitors the output frequency If the output frequency drops below the PI Snooze Level b5 22 and stays below that level for at least the PI Snooze Delay Time b5 23 the Drive output shuts off This is different from the Sleep Function because it is the feedback that must drop below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level b5 24 before normal Drive output will begin again See Figure 5 19 on the following page B b5 25 PI Setpoint Boost Setting Setting Range 0 100 Factory Default 0 Just before the Snooze Function is activated the PI Setpoin
206. he H4 0X parameters in the programming manual TM E7 02 for additional programming details Electrical Installation 2 14 Serial Communications Terminals are provided for full duplex or half duplex connections to the Drive for RS422 RS485 serial communication For half duplex operation via Metasys N2 protocol enabled with option J APOGEE FLN protocol enabled with option U or Modbus protocol enabled with option V field configuration of these terminals is required When no cost options J U or V are ordered e Jumpers are provided for field installation on terminals TB4 1 to TB4 3 and TB4 2 to TB4 4 e The E7 Drive is programmed to enable the appropriate protocol parameter H5 08 baud rate parameter 5 02 RTS control parameter H5 07 and error detection time parameter 5 09 Option L LonWorks does not require jumpers and with the exception of H5 07 employs the same parameter settings as Modbus Table 2 11 Factory Programming for Serial Communication Parameter Function J U V L H5 02 Baud Rate 3 9600 Baud 2 4800 Baud 3 9600 Baud 3 9600 Baud 5 07 RTS Control 1 Enabled 1 Enabled 1 Enabled 0 Disabled H5 08 Protocol 1 N2 Metasys 0 Modbus 0 Modbus For co ordination with other E7 Technical Manuals the table below provides the equivalency between E7N Control 2 terminal designations and E7 Drive terminal designations used in TM E7 01 TM E7 02 TM E7 21 TM E7 22
207. he date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made Introduction ili This manual may describe trademarked equipment which is the property of other companies These trademarks the property of the registered owner companies and may include the following APOGEE FLN trademark of Siemens Building Technologies Inc Metasys trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus trademark of Schneider Automation Inc LONWoRKS trademark of Echelon Corporation BACnet Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product These documents may be provided with the product or upon request or downloaded from www drives com Documents may include the following TM E7 01 USER Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 02 Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 11 Modbus Manual included on CD ROM with product TM AFD 20 LONWORKS Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 21 APOGEE Manual included on CD ROM with product TM E7 22 Metasys Manual included on CD ROM with product DriveWizard Software and Manual Included on CD ROM with product Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product Definitions of Acronyms and Abbreviations AC AIC CB CIMR CN CPT CPU DIP FLA FVFF HOA HP IEC IGV IPM KVA LED Alternating Current Amps Interrupting Capacity Circuit Breaker Control Induction Motor Rotation Co
208. his parameter For example in variable air volume AHUs with a volume matching control strategy differential control 15 employed with feedback signals connected to both terminals Al and A2 B H3 03 Drive Terminal 1 Bias Setting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 In order to have the Drive properly interpret an analog input it may be necessary to apply a gain and or a bias to the signal The analog inputs have a resolution of 10 bits 1024 steps Using the factory default settings for the analog input s gain and bias the 0 10Vdc or 4 20mA signal at the analog input will yield a 0 100 speed command span Gain 100 Output Frequency Bias 0 Analog Input Signal Fig 5 24 Output Frequency as Commanded Via Analog Input If a different span of analog input signal is desirable it will be necessary to adjust the gain the bias or both to allow the analog input level to generate the desired frequency command Adjustment of the gain setting will change the speed command that is equivalent to the maximum analog input 10Vdc or 20 If for instance the gain is increased to 200 then 10Vdc or 20mA will be equivalent to a 200 speed command and 5 VAC or 12mA will be equivalent to a 100 Speed Command Since the Drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter E1 04 0 5Vdc or 4 12mA will now be equivalent to 0 100 speed command span Programming 5 54 Gain 200 100
209. igital input terminal S7 1 ON 0 OFF Not used Operation 1 Operating Zero speed 1 Zero speed Frequency agree 1 Matched Desired frequency agree 1 Matched Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency gt L4 01 Drive startup completed 1 Startup completed Low voltage detection 1 Detected Baseblock 1 Drive output baseblock Frequency reference mode 1 Not communication 0 Communication Run command mode 1 Not communication 0 Communication Overtorque detection 1 Detected Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Retrying error 1 Retrying Error including Modbus communications time out 1 Error occurred Modbus communications time out 1 Timed out 002bEH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH Flash software number Communication error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used 003DH Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Bit 6 Bits 7 to F KVA setting Control method Framing error Time out Not used 003EH 003FH Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors be reset while the Drive is operating Communications D 12 B Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data Broadcast data can be written to Table D 6 Broadcast Data Register Address Contents Bit 0 Run command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Rev
210. inals Continued Sept erue Signal Level Multi function Multi function analog output Frequency Output analog monitor 1 0 to 10 VDC or 4 20 Drive terminal FM 0 to 10 VDC 100 frequency Function set by mA set by Jumper J2 H4 01 and H4 07 signals mer 7 Multi function 00 10 VDC or 4 20 mA Current Monitor analog monitor 2 set by Jumper J3 and H4 08 TB3 4 TB5 6 Multi function analog output 0 to 10 VAC 100 Drive terminal AM Drive s rated current Function set by H4 04 EA Conimmicatiomdliput Differential input ET For 2 wire RS 485 short TB4 3 to TB4 1 optical isolation TB4 3 and TB4 4 to TB4 2 Diff ial i a ms ferential input N ME gt Electrical Installation 2 22 Wiring Diagram TET FH 499 FROM 121 CUSTOMER S 4 o A C LINES 27 17 02 0 L3 1 T3 GND LUG STANDARD DISCONNECT SWITCH m OPTION G HH HE 2 NOTES EL T e OR wl T1 T2 T3 OPTION C DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BREAKER MCP al SWITCH z 1 J OR O M n 1 4 SS SS Se SS ip OPTION 107 9 1 a 3G E ET at DRIVE C IN
211. ines the amount of time DC Injection 15 applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp This should be set to a minimum of 0 50 seconds when using HSB This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely Setting Factory Menu Range Setting Location Quick Setting Quick Setting FE Drive Delay Time Setting After run command drive output will start after this delay time 0 to 600 ao um Programming 0 00 to 0 00 to 1 61 13 1 this parameter instead selects whether the AUTO reference is retained as the new HAND reference setting 0 or drive will ramp from AUTO reference to the existing HAND reference setting 1 Parameters A 4 Parameter Parameter Name N LCD Digital Operator 0 Display Motor Pre Heat Current b2 09 Preheat Current Motor Pre Heat Current 2 b2 10 Preheat Current2 Speed Search Selection peat SpdSrch at Start Speed Search Deactivation Current SpdSrch Current b3 02 Speed Search Deceleration Time SpdSrch Dec Time Speed Search Delay Time 259 Search Delay Bidirectional Speed Search Selection Bidir Search Sel b3 03 b3 14 Timer Function ON Delay Time Delay ON Timer b4 01 Timer Function OFF Delay b4 02 Time Delay OFF Timer PI Mode Setting b5 01 PI Mode b5 04 Integral Limit Setting PII Limit b5 06 PI Output Limit PI Limit b5 07 PI Offset Adjustment
212. iodic Inspections With no Power Applied Corrective Action External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly mounting bolts connectors etc Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors M Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using 9 Cooling ins clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Bypass Operator Interface PCB Bypass T ie clean and dry at a pressure between 55 85 psi Control PCB Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Power PCB Gate Drive PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using Contactors Input Diodes Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using Output Transistors modules or components clean and dry air at a pressure between 55 85 psi or IPMs DC bus capacitors n 255 Replace the capacitors or Drive discoloration or odor Apply power to the Drive and Bypass then conduct the following inspection Table 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied Corrective Action Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Check U1 40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time Cooling fan s Replace Cooling Fan Maintenance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance Table 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Points Check Points Every 3 6 Months Ambient Temperatur
213. ion H3 09 16 then the PI Offset is the targeted maintained differ ential between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Menu location is Quick Setting when b5 01 1 Parameters A 5 Menu Location Setting Range Factory Setting 0 to100 0 Programming 0 to 10 Programming 0 to 3 Programming 0 to 200 120 Programming 0 1 to 10 0 Programming 0 0 to 20 0 Programming 0 or Programming 0 0 to 3000 0 0 0sec 3 Programming Quick Setting 0 0 to 3000 0 0 0sec Programming Quick Setting Quick Setting 100 Programming pes 100 0 Programming 0 0 Programming and Programming when b5 01 0 Parameter No b5 08 b5 09 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display PI Primary Delay Time Constant PI Delay Time PI Output Level Selection Output Level Sel Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Sets the amount of time for a filter on the output of the PI controller Determines whether the PI controller will be direct or reverse acting 0 Normal Output direct acting 1 Reverse Output reverse acting Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00sec Menu Location Programming Programming Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running b5 10 b5 11 b5 12 b5 13 b
214. ire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2 of the rated voltage Line voltage drop is calculated as follows IMPORTANT 3 Line voltage drop V V3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 10 Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive remove all power sources including main input power and control circuit power Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal before WARNING removing any cover The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside Even if the charge lamp is off one must measure the AC input output and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death Electrical Installation 2 3 Cable Length between Drive and Motor The Bypass unit should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of load side power cable needed between the Drive and the motor If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase causing the Drive output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this reduce cable length or if necessary adjust the carrier frequency set in C6 02 as shown in Table 2 1 The line side power cables load side power cables and the control wiring should all be run in a separate conduit Careful attention to this recommended desi
215. is remembered even 1f the power is cycled to the Drive If d4 01 0 Disabled then when a new Run command is issued the Drive s speed command will be 0 rpm If d4 01 1 Enabled then the speed command will be the last commanded speed before the Run command was removed Programming 5 43 E1 V f Pattern B E1 01 Input Voltage Setting Setting Range 155 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 310 0V to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 208 0V 208V Models 240 0V 240V Models 480 0V 480V Models Set the Input Voltage parameter 1 01 to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive 1 e Overvoltage Stall Prevention etc E1 01 also serves as the Maximum Base Voltage used by the Preset V Hz curves E1 03 0 to D B E1 03 V f Pattern Selection Wh _ _ SSCS aid Hs Bh The Drive operates utilizing a set V f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 14 different preset V f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles saturation levels frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set Customize the V f pattern using parameters E1 04 through 1 13 U
216. ive 01H Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run 22H E Slave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not IMPORTANT return response messages to the master Communications D 14 Modbus Self Diagnosis The Drive has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of serial communication interface circuits The self diagnosis function connects the communication parts of the send and receive terminals receives the data sent by the Drive and checks if communication is being performed normally Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 oe ae S 6 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive and set parameter H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection to 67 Com Test Mode Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF Turn ON the terminating resistance Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 Turn ON the power
217. ize Parameters Init Parameters Password 1 Enter Password Password 2 Select Password User Parameter 1 User Param 1 User Parameter 2 User Param 2 User Parameter 3 User Param 3 User Parameter 4 User Param 4 User Parameter 5 User Param 5 User Parameter 6 User Param 6 Table A 1 Parameter List Description Initialization Language selection for digital operator display 0 English 2 Deutsch 3 Francais 4 Italiano 5 Espanol 6 Portugues Not returned to factory setting by initialization This setting determines which parameters are accessible 0 Operation Only 1 User Level 2 Advanced Level Used to return all parameters to their factory or user setting 0 No Initialize 1110 User Initialize The user must set their own parameter default values and then parameter 02 03 must be set to 1 to save them If the parameter values are changed after 02 03 is set to 1 the user default values can be restored by setting 1 03 to 1110 2220 2 Wire Initial 3330 3 Wire Initial When the value set into 1 04 does NOT match the value set into A1 05 parameters 1 01 thru 1 03 and A2 32 cannot be changed All other parameters determined by 1 01 can be changed Parameter 1 05 be accessed by displaying parameter A1 04 then press and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously User Parameters Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level 1 01 1
218. l Operator use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal PE as shown in Figure 2 6 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 13 PE Shield terminal External Speed lt Potentiometer Fig 2 6 Analog Input Terminal Configuration Electrical Installation 2 13 Analog Outputs Two analog outputs are provided both can be configured for a signal level of 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA The signal level is controlled by the position of jumpers J2 and J3 see Figures 1 8 and 1 9 for location on Control PCB A2 and by the values selected for Drive parameters H4 07 and H4 08 B Configuring the Analog Outputs Table 2 9 Analog Outputs Terminals Jumper Position Analog AC Parameter Parameter Output Common Signal Level Terminal H4 07 H4 08 For Drive programming reference B Programming the Analog Outputs The TB3 4 and TB5 6 analog outputs can be programmed to be proportional to any of the following Drive variables Table 2 10 Analog Output Proportional Variables Description Setting 2 SFS Output 3 Frequency Ref Output Freq Output Current pf Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage Output kWatts 53 Term Al Level Auto Mode Fref Term 2 Level Hand Mode Fref Mot SEC Current 058 PI Feedback 2 SFS is the internal soft starter signal This signal is generated from the reference and often it passes through the accel decel functions See Page A 17 or t
219. l operator keypad and attach the DriveWizard cable in its place Programming 5 79 T1 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software Part Number DWST616 C2 Available by download from www drives com B 11 02 Motor Rated Power Setting Range 0 00 to 650 00 kW Factory Default Model Dependent B 11 04 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent Factory Default Model Dependent Auto tuning is recommended to achieve optimum performance In addition the Drive requires Line To Line Resistance auto tuning before it can properly perform the Estimated Speed Search method This method of speed search allows for bi directional speed search The T1 parameters are found under the Auto Tuning menu B Auto Tuning Using DriveWizard DriveWizard is a PC software program designed to provide the tools necessary to handle Drive installation as well as parameter record keeping and maintenance As such it provides an Auto Tuning method for Drives in Bypass units The Auto Tuning function tunes the Drive setup to the characteristics of the specific motor to which it is applied Auto Tuning is essential if bi directional Speed Search is required and enabled for the application DriveWizard can be obtained either through CD or www Drives com Follow the installation procedures provided with the software With the DriveWizard software loaded onto a PC connect a standard CAT 5 Ethernet cable from the
220. le 3 13 Auto Run Indicator On Green The E7N is in AUTO mode and has received a Run command at TB1 2 Off The E7N 16 not in AUTO mode or has not received a Run command when in AUTO mode B Drive Ready Indicator Table 3 14 Drive Ready Indicator On Green The Drive is ready to run or is running no faults Off The Drive has a fault that will prevent operation B Auto Rem Xfer Status Indicator Table 3 15 Auto Rem Xfer Status Indicator Auto Transfer to Bypass operation or Remote Transfer to Bypass operation 15 active Off Auto or Remote Transfer to Bypass are not active Auto Transfer may be disabled by DIP switch 52 1 5 Status Indicator Table 3 16 Damper BAS Status Indicator A NC damper end switch or other BAS interlock contact at TB1 3 is On Red open Off This function is disabled by DIP switch S2 8 or a contact closure exists between terminals TB1 3 and 1 9 Control Panel 3 8 Selector Key Indicators When off these selector key indicators simply mean that the function has not been selected The table below describes the operation when these functions are selected and the key indicator 1s lit HAND Amber The Drive or Bypass 15 operated via the local control panel Run command is automatic The Run command has been removed from the Drive or Bypass AUTO The Drive or Bypass is operated via a remote device DDC or BAS Drive Test Amber The Drive is operat
221. le Programmable Function Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Active 52 6 S2 5 S2 4 53 3 53 2 S3 1 53 6 53 5 53 4 1 Bypass Run OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ENERGIZED Running in Bypass mode 2 Damper Coil OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ENERGIZED Damper actuator activation 3 Auto Transfer OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ENERGIZED Auto Transfer is active 4 Drive Run OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ENERGIZED is the Run mode 5 Serial Com OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ENERGIZED Comm Run command 6 Hand Mode ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ENERGIZED Manual mode operation 7 Auto Mode ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ENERGIZED Auto mode operation 8 System Fault ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON DEENERGIZED Drive motor or control fault Factory Settings ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ACTIVE RELAY CONDITION DURING FUNCTION Building Automation System Run Stop Circuit A control terminal block position TB1 terminals 2 and 9 is provided to connect the Normally Open NO Run Stop contact from a BAS or other remote controller for auto mode control There must be continuity between these terminals in order for the motor to run in auto mode Safety Interlock Circuit A control terminal block position TB1 terminals and 9 is provided to conn
222. le power Recycle the power and check the keypad and its connection Replace H O A keypad Switches to bypass mode by itself after Drive run command Drive will not run Drive is not responding properly Check the drive cable and connections Recycle the power eae Check 54 3 to be ON Check the fuse F102 working us oe Check 54 1 to be ON Check the fuse F102 working ane E Senet Check CN104 4 and 5 to both be inactivated Check the fuse F102 working Stays in bypass mode and does not accept any Check TB1 4 and 5 to be off Check the Drive connections Recycle the Drive command power bad PCB A2 Drive analog outputs always at max off or very low Check J2 and J3 jumpers are not missing and in right position 1 2 for I 2 3 for V check the H4 parameters Drive or Bypass begins to run when Auto is pressed with no contact closure at TB1 2 Check programming of parameter H2 02 This parameter must be set to Run Src Com Opt for all E7N units See Table 5 1 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 4 The overall layout of PCB 2 is shown in Figure 6 1 for further reference Customer Connector Connection For cable to Terminals 1 Customer 120V Circuit Fuse mD Customer Configuration Switches Connectors 9 to Panel ogg ee PE III Wiring Sb See NN Ei E Harnesses nee m mm H
223. lects how this input will be used by the Drive 5 4 Control H5 08 ae N A Protocol Select N2 Metasys 5 4 Programming 5 24 Table 5 4 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings with Control HAND Speed Drive Terminal 2 Parameters Effected by Options Specified and Coded e TERS AUTO Settings PCB DIP PCBDIP Source or 5 9 Options Specified Switch 1 Switch 54 Run Stop Speed or Stone 95 01 1 03 1 04 43 081 H5 2 H5 7 H5 8 Keypad 4 20 0 10 3 15 Feedback S5 S6 d1 01 mA VDC PSIG Terminal Serial TB3 3 Serial Kevpad Se 1 2 A2 P3 SHE 2 que _ NET X EGER NES EX 4 181 21 Nm ME MEINES LEN ES 3ESES EX MEN XE RM MN Definitions L LonWorks Option Card The Drive factory default J Native Protocol Metasys N2 The H O A selector keys must have AUTO selected P Pneumatic Interface 3 to 15 PSIG to allow serial com to control the Drive U Native Protocol APOGEE FLN Don t care V Native Protocol Modbus Jumper required TB5 5 to TB1 12 and TB1 13 to TB5 2 Parameter Reference b5 01 PI Control Selection H5 02 Communication Speed Selection 0 Disable default 3 9600 Baud default 1 Enable 2 4800 Baud H1 03 Drive Terminal S5 Function Sele
224. ll prevention function is enabled When the output current exceeds the level set by the L3 02 parameter the Drive will discontinue accelerating and maintain speed If during acceleration the output current comes within 15 of the level set by parameter L3 02 the acceleration time is lengthened Once the output current level has dropped below the L3 02 level acceleration will begin again with the acceleration rate reaching the programmed rate once again 15 below the L3 02 level Stall level during 14 02 acceleration END D Output Current Output frequency Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling Time Fig 5 30 Detailed Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active acceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to accelerate as quickly as possible without exceeding the L3 02 output current level IMPORTANT Stall Prevention during Acceleration is not effective when the output frequency is less than 6Hz Programming 5 61 The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 01 1 General Purpose a Set accel time b Accel time is extended Output Frequency Output Current TIME Fig 5 31 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration The L3 02 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the moto
225. ll stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus volt age is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltme ter set to the highest scale Table 6 8 Main Circuit Test Procedure Set the digital multi meter to its highest VDC scale Measure between 1 and for the following check Place the positive red meter lead on 1 Place the negative black meter lead on If the measured voltage is lt 10Vdc it is safe to work inside the Drive If not wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged Measure DC Bus Voltage The input diodes rectify or transform the three phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage 1 Seta digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting 2 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading 15 about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading 1s about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading 1s about 0 5 Volts Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place th
226. losed Hand Open Auto Bypass Drv Enbl Same as 6A except a run command is accepted Motor Preheat 2 Closed Enable motor preheat with the current level as set by b2 10 EmergOverrideFWD Closed Forward Emergency Override Command EmergOverrideREV Closed Reverse Emergency Override Command 4 2 wire 3 3 wire 6 2 wire 4 3 wire 0 to 6E Parameters A 14 Menu Location Digital Inputs Programming Programming Parameter Name Parameter FAS No LCD Digital Operator Display Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection Term 1 2 Sel H2 01 Terminal M3 M4 Function Selection Term M3 M4 Sel H2 02 Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Description Digital Outputs 0 During RUN 1 Closed when a run command is input or the drive is outputting voltage Zero Speed Closed when drive output frequency is less than Fmin E1 09 Fref Fout Agree 1 Closed when drive output speed equals the speed command within the bandwidth of L4 02 Fref Set Agree 1 Closed when the drive output speed and the speed command are equal to the value in L4 01 within the bandwidth of L4 02 Freq Detect 1 Closed when the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 Freq Detect 2 Closed when the drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 Inverter Ready C
227. losed when the drive is not in a fault state and not in program mode DC Bus Undervolt Closed when the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip level L2 05 Base Blk 1 Closed when the drive is not outputting voltage Operator Reference Closed when the speed command is coming from the digital operator A Remote Auto Oper Closed when the run command is coming from the digital operator B Trq Det 1 N O Closes when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 C Loss of Ref Closes when the drive has detected a loss of analog speed command Speed command is considered lost when it drops 90 in 0 4 seconds Parameter L4 05 determines drive reaction to a loss of speed command D DB Overheat E Fault Closes when the drive experiences a major fault F Not Used 10 Minor Fault Closes when drive experiences a minor fault or alarm 11 Reset Cmd Active Closes when the drive receives a reset command from terminals or serial comms 12 Timer Output Output for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input 17 Trq Det 1 N C Opens when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 1A Reverse Dir Closes when the drive is running in the reverse direction 1E Restart Enabled Closes when the drive is performing an automatic
228. lues stored in the digital operator with the parameter values currently in the Drive by using the VERIFY function This VERIFY function should not be confused with the VERIFY that is displayed on the digital operator when viewing the Modified Constants menu To VERIFY the parameter values in the Drive as compared with those stored in the digital operator set 03 01 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY During the comparing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display uFy If all the parameter values stored in the digital operator do not match those programmed in the Drive the digital operator displays the following uYE Programming 5 78 The digital operator will not display which parameters did not match only that the verification found discrepancies in some parameter values NOTE In order to properly use the COPY or VERIFY functions the following Drive specifications must be identical between the Drive that the parameters were read from and the Drive that the parameters are to be written to e Model Number e g CIMR E7U2015 e Software Number e g 03011 also known as FLASH ID Yaskawa offers DriveWizard software that can also READ COPY and VERIFY Drive parameter values DriveWizard lists all discrepancies between the Drive and a pre saved parameter file when verifying is performed To use Drive Wizard first select 2 15 0 Disabled and select 02 06 0 Disabled then remove the digita
229. ly 1 00 will be displayed if it has been changed Other initialize mode settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings In the verify menu the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming menus Use the INCREASE DECREASE and Shift RESET keys to change the parameters When the DATA ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting the user parameter will be written into memory and the display will return to parameter monitor automatically Example Operations An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings b1 01 Reference Selection C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting and E2 01 Motor Rated Current Menu Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Verify Menu Frequency reference Frequency reference selection selection ENTER ENTER n NS SS vt NN DATA E ENTER LI 01 LI 010 5 Acceleration time 1 DATA ENTER mil SS ve DATA TG ENTER tI LIL 1106401 ESC uiti DATA_ Input voltage setting ENTER tiu DATA ENTER DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY eoo eo DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Fig 3 7 Operations in Verify Menu Control Panel 3 20 Auto Tuning Menu For E7 Bypass units Auto Tuning can only
230. mand 15 a 0 10 VDC or a 4 20 mA signal The positive side of the signal should be connected to terminal TB3 3 of the E7N terminal strip The of the remote speed command signal should be connected to terminal TB3 1 of the E7N See the connection diagram on page 1 of the E7N Bypass unit schematic E7N 00 or Chapter 5 in this manual Note The factory default is 4 20 mA to change to 0 to 10 VDC adjust parameter H3 08 to 0 0 10VDC and move E7N switch S1 2 on the terminal to the OFF position toward the unit rear For the Auto mode request a run command and speed command signal from the building automation system to confirm remote auto operation Press the AUTO key the DRIVE Run LEDs red and green the AUTO LED green and AUTO Run LED green will light and the Drive output will ramp up to the Auto mode speed command Observe if the remote speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired If not perform the following See Chapter 5 For 0 10 VDC input at Terminal TB3 3 1 With no input adjust the Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 HZ is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust the Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 HZ or other desired maximum frequency is obtained For 4 20 mA input at Terminal TB3 3 1 With 4 mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0 HZ is obtained 2 With 20 mA input adjust Gain H3 10 setting until an output
231. meter B1 04 Commanding Point 73 to a value of 1 enables the Drive for reverse run Refer to the either the E7 User s Manual or the E7 MODBUS Technical Manual for MODBUS communication set up and configuration The E7 User s Manual and the MODBUS Technical Manual provide a reference to E7 Drive parameters and their respective Drive addresses Communications D 26 Appendix E Peripheral Devices This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection E 2 Branch Circuit Overload Protection E 3 Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices E 1 Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given installation Use Table E 1 or E 2 when selecting fuses and circuit breakers per the NEC When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input lt protection and comply with UL CSA NEC and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements select one of the fuses in Table E 3 or E 4 Fuse Type UL designated Time Delay or Non Time Delay Fuse Class CC J T RK1 or RK5 Designators typical KTK FNQ FRS LPJ LPS JKS JIN or JJS Voltage Rating 250V for Drives with 208V input 600V for
232. minal block position TB1 3 is provided to connect Normally Open NO enabling contacts such as damper end switches or occupied cycle timers An open contact will override the run com mand preventing Drive or Bypass operation until these input contacts are closed For example this input could insure that the system dampers achieve an operating position before the fan is started in order to protect the ductwork from over pressure When Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode the E7N will display red Damper BAS LED in the System Status area of the front control panel This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start up 1 Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will be added later in the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch 52 8 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system Start Up and Operation 4 13 Contact Closure Inputs Auto Mode Run Stop Contact Input TB1 3 and TB1 4 are input terminals used for the Run Stop command when in the AUTO mode When these input contacts close the unit will begin running When the contacts reopen the unit will cease running Remote
233. mming Programming Programming Im COPY Function m 03 01 03 02 This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the digital operator 0 COPY SELECT no function 1 INV gt OP READ All parameters are copied from the drive to the digital operator Copy Function Selection 2 OP gt INV WRITE All parameters are copied from 0 to3 Programming Copy Function Sel the digital operator into the drive 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the digital operator NOTE When using the copy function the drive model number and software number U1 14 must match or an error will occur Enables and disables all digital operator copy functions Read Allowed Selection 0 Disabled No digital operator copy functions are 0101 Read Allowable allowed 1 Enabled Copying allowed pm Auto Tuning IE T1 02 Sets the motor rated power in kW Moor BREU TOAS NOTE T1 02 should be left at the Drive default the last UO Auto Tuning Mtr Rated Power ie 650 00 Dependent 3 digits of the Drive model number T1 04 Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current kVA kVA Rated Current Used only during an auto tune Dependent Dependent Table A 2 Monitor List Parameter Parameter Name Description No LCD Digital Operator Display rere Frequency reference speed command monitor when in auto Frequency Reference q y mode frequency
234. motor applications Peripheral Devices 3 Peripheral Devices The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R LI S L2 and T L3 Never connect a general LC RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit CAUTION Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to the input or output sides or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor never turn it on or off during operation For more details on peripheral devices contact the manufacturer Magnetic Contactor Mount a surge protector on the coil When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive do not exceed one start per hour AC and DC reactor When using the E7N on a power supply transformer with a capacity of 600kVA or more install a DC reactor The reactor improves the input power factor and provides protection to the rectifier circuit within the Drive Noise filter Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction Peripheral Devices E 4 Drives Technical Support USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact D
235. n OPE fault U1 36 PI Input Displays the error in the PI regulator U1 36 PI Setpoint PI Input PI Feedback 01 37 PI Output Displays the output of the PI as a percentage of maximum PI Output frequency 1 04 U1 38 PI Setpoint Displays the setpoint of the PI regulator U1 38 PI reference PI Setpoint PI bias CRC error Data length error Not used Always 0 Memobus Communication Error Code Parity error Transmit Err Overrun error Fleming error Timeover Not used Always 0 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time Displays total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan FAN Elapsed Time Auto Mode Frequency Reference Value AUTO Mode Fref Hand Mode Frequency Reference Displays the frequency reference speed command when in 1 52 Value hand mode or displays Terminal A2 when differential mode is HAND Mode Fref selected PI Feedback 2 Value U1 53 PI Feedback 2 Displays PI feedback 2 value Units depend on b5 31 setting scaling 15 set by b5 20 Displays the frequency reference speed command when in auto mode Parameters A 27 Fault Trace List Table A 3 Fault Trace List Fault Trace Current Fault Bored Current Fault Previous Fault weve Last Fault Frequency Reference at Most Recent Fault U2 03 Frequency Ref U2 04 Output Frequency at Most Recent Fault Output Freq U2 05 Output Current at Most Recen
236. n Set as a percentage of maximum frequency E1 04 Temporary increase of PI setpoint to create an overshoot of the intended PI setpoint Sets a time limitation for reaching temporarily boosted PI setpoint intended PI setpoint b5 25 PI snooze mode will be activated when PI feedback is above this level Set as a percentage of maximum frequency 1 04 PI Output Gain Setting Sets the output gain of the PI controller 0 0 to 25 0 0 0 limit when PI output goes negative Drive stops 1 Reverse when PI goes negative Drive reverses 0 limit automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 0 to 100 0 0 to 25 5 0 0 to 200 0 DE pune Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds 0 0 to 25 5 Sleep Time PI Accel Decel Time Acc Dec Time Applies an accel decel time to the PI setpoint reference 0 0 to 25 5 0 Disabled eed Enabled 0 00 to 100 00 0 to 39999 1 0 0 1 0sec 0 0Hz 0 0sec 0 0sec 0 00 0 Osec 0 0 Osec 60 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running Range depends b5 20 setting Units depend b5 31 setting Parameters 6 Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Paramete
237. n Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command Use the following information if the motor operates at a higher speed than the Speed Command B signal is being input to the Speed Command current terminal A2 If a preset frequency reference 15 selected the preset reference takes priority over the normal reference If the PI mode of operation is enabled the Drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint Then the Drive speed may go to maximum Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 21 If the Motor Overheats Take the following steps if the motor overheats B The load is too high If the motor load 15 too high and the motor is used when the effective torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor will overheat Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size B The ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run con tinuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within its acceptable range B The withstand voltage between the m
238. n Selection Seting NN Always Detected factory default Detected only during operation B F6 03 Option PCB External Fault Stopping Method Sting 0 Ramp to Coast to Stop factory default Alam Only If an external fault is received from the LonWorks or other communication option card the settings of F6 02 and F6 03 will determine the Drive operation in reaction to the fault signal Parameter F6 02 will determine if the external fault is always recognized F6 02 0 Always Detected or only recognized when the Run command is active 6 02 1 Detected only during operation Once the fault is recognized parameter F6 03 will determine the operation of the Drive If parameter F6 03 is set to anything other then 3 the Drive will fault and a stopping sequence is begun If F6 03 3 Alarm Only then the external fault is treated like an alarm Operation will continue and an EFO fault will flash on the digital operator Programming 5 48 B F6 05 Current Scaling via Communication Option Setting Description A Display factory default 100 8192 Drive Rated Current A communication option card can read the Drive s DPRAM to access the current monitor The format of the current reading in the DPRAM will be determined by parameter F6 05 6 05 0 A Display gt Current is a decimal number corresponding to actual Amperes 6 05 1 100 8192 Drive Rated Current gt Cur
239. n of Exter nal Fault from Communica tion Option Card EFO Detection Stopping Method for External Fault from Communication Option Card EFO Fault Action Current Monitor Display Unit Selection Current Unit Sel Phase to phase motor resistance normally set by the autotuning routine Sets the stopping method for option PCB communications error BUS fault Active only when a communications option PCB is installed and when b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 0 Always detected Detected only during run Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop Alarm Only 0 A Display Amps Display 100 8192 Drive Rated Current Parameters A 11 0 to 3 0 or 1 to 3 0 or 1 Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Parameter No LCD Digital Operator Description Display Digital Inputs 3 wire control FWD REV selection for 3 wire sequence Local Remote Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Hand Open Auto Option Inv Sel Selects source of speed command and sequence Closed b1 01 amp b1 02 Open Option Card Multi Step Ref 1 Closed speed command from d1 02 or Aux Terminal Open speed command determined by b1 01 Terminal 53 Function Multi Step Ref 2 Selection Closed speed command from d1 03 or d1 04 Terminal S3 Sel Open speed command determined by b1 01 0 to
240. n stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Programming 5 27 Options J U V or L Serial Communications Bypass with Control and serial communication for run stop control Setpoint input Hand mode speed command Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Bypass from serial communication Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact opening H O A Auto selects serial com for both the run stop command and speed command A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure H O A Hand allows b1 01 to select Keypad Operato
241. n the Digital Operator failed P ER Replace Digital Operator CPE The Drive product code or software number Use COPY function for the same product ID UNMATCHED is different code and software number VAE The capacity of the Drive being copied and INV KVA UNMATCH the capacity in the Digital Operator are different READ IFE The read data length does not agree Function READ DATA ERROR The write data is incorrect Use COPY function for the same Drive capacity The control method of the Drive being copied and the control method in the CRE Use the COPY function for the same COPY CONTROL UNMATCHED Disial Opertorare diterent control method Function CYE The parameter written to the Drive was compared with the parameter in the Digital COPY retest COPY ERROR Operator and they were different The checksum in the Drive parameter area CSE was compared with the checksum in the SUM CHECK ERROR Digital Operator parameter area and they i were different Verify VYE The set value of the digital operator and the E id eds cct Function VERIFY ERROR Drive do not match iiA retested Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 18 Drive Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system 15 started up If this occurs use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If a fault is displayed on the digital operator refer t
242. n the front panel determine the operating mode Within each operating mode are two methods of control HAND and AUTO The HAND OFF AUTO selector keys on the front panel determine this control method Table 4 1 provides a look at various combinations of the control panel selector key positions control inputs to TB1 through 5 and the status of the DIP switch selectable functions Control Panel LEDs Table 4 1 2 Contactor Bypass Inputs and Operating Modes Selector Buttons Contact Closure Inputs DIP Switch Selectable Functions r Drive or FARK RECUERDE RR RN oy Operating H O A Bypass Test Run Xfer Purge DIP Drive DIP DIP Mode Safety Auto Rem Damper 1 O Die 50 D 1 X E X X Nos j X 14 2 Die 1050 D 1 x O 0 juv 0 D E x None X J p 4 1 _ __ _ __ 0 _ Nee Status LEDs gt er n Dwe p Jp 1 gt eK ie _ _ _ ___ ___ 6 Bypass N 0 D X Bypass 7 H Bypass T D X 8 Bypass N D E E X None On j Bypass 0 D E X H 1 D x Bps
243. nable command before applying the run command FAN Failure of the Drive internal cooling fan Cooling Fan Error when L8 32 0 Drive cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 13 Table 6 4 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PI Feedback source signal Check to ensure the PI Feedback PI Feedback Loss source is installed and working This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss PI Feedback source properly Detection is programmed to fault e g transducer sensor build FBL M P Feedback Loss 05 12 2 and the ing automation signal is not Pd E motor for a phase to PI Feedback PI Feedback Loss Detection installed correctly or is not phase short Level b5 13 for the PI Feedback Loss working Check the Drive for a phase to Detection Time b5 14 phase short at the output Verify C1 01 and C1 02 are set correctly Ensure the values in LL3 Loss of Load Detection 1 Loss of Load Det 1 Drive output current L6 02 for more than Motor is underloaded Flashing the time set in L6 03 to eliminate fault Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat Check for dirt build up on the OH The temperature of the Drive cooling fin Cooling fan s are not working fans and cooling fins high i Heatsnk Overtemp exceeded the temperature programmed in 15
244. nd the drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Disabled Drive runs a set frequency A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC fault Decel Time 1 In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading the drive will start to decelerate at Decel time 1 C1 02 if the output current exceeds the level set by L3 06 Once the current level drops below the L3 06 level the drive will accelerate back to its set frequency at the active acceleration rate Decel Time 2 Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 C1 04 For 6Hz or less frequency stall prevention function during run is disabled regardless of L3 05 set This function is enabled when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Drive rated current is set as 10096 Normally changing the setting is not required Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting Parameters A 20 0 to 2 0 to 200 0 to 3 0 to 2 30 to 200 Factory Setting ETE Stall Prevention 120 120 Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Table A 1 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Descr Setting Factory Menu No LCD Digital Operator Display Setting Location Ref Detection Speed Agreement Detection Level L4 01 T E L4 01 and L4 02 are used in conjunction with the 0 0 to 200 0 0 0Hz Programming Spd Agr
245. nding on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non differential PI loop Every time the PI output is updated the offset b5 07 is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation H3 09 16 PI Differential then this parameter is the target set point for the differential to be maintained between the signal measured on analog input 1 and the signal measured on analog input A2 Programming 5 30 05 08 PI Primary Delay Time Constant Setting Range 0 00 to 10 00 Seconds Factory Default 0 00 Seconds Acts as a time based filter that lowers the responsiveness of the PI function but also makes the function more stable when the setpoint varies rapidly or when the feedback 15 noisy B b5 09 Output Level Selection Seting IL o 3 1i Normal Output direct acting factory default Reverse Output reverse acting Normally the output of the PI function causes an increase in motor speed whenever the measured feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as direct acting response However if b5 09 1 Reverse Output the output of the PI function causes the motor to slow down when the feedback is below the setpoint This is referred to as reverse acting response B b5 10 Output Gain Setting
246. ng power to the Drive while the Run Command is applied may cause the Drive to start unexpectedly Therefore make sure all personnel are clear from the Drive motor and machine prior to reset Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Description Option Communication Error After initial communication was established the connection was lost BUS Option Com Err Modbus Communication Error Control data was not received correctly for two seconds CE Memobus Com Err Operator Communication Fault 1 Transmission between the Drive and the digital operator cannot be established within 5 seconds after supplying power COM ERR OP amp INV External RAM of CPU is defective Operator Communication Fault 2 After communication started with the digital operator a communication fault occurred for 2 seconds or more CPFO1 COM ERR OP amp INV 2 BB Circuit Err Baseblock Circuit Fault Baseblock circuit fault at power up EEPROM Error EEPROM Fault EEPROM fault check sum not valid Cause Connection 1s broken master has stopped communicating Connection 1s broken master has stopped communicating Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Control circuit damage Digital operator cable not securely connected digital operator defective control board defective Gate array hardware failure during
247. nnector Control Power Transformer Central Processing Unit Dual Inline Package Full Load Amperes Forced Ventilated inlet Filter outlet Filter Hand Off Auto Horsepower International Electrotechnical Commission Inlet Guide Vanes Intelligent Power Module Kilo Volt Amperes Light Emitting Diode Terminology in This Manual Standard or Configured options are available with standard lead times LRA MCP MTBF NC NEC NEMA NO OLR PCB PI RTS SFS TB THD VA VAC VAV Locked Rotor Amperes Motor Circuit Protector Mean Time Between Failures Normally Closed National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association Normally Open Over Load Relay Printed Circuit Board Proportional plus Integral control action Request To Send Soft Start Terminal Block Total Harmonic Distortion Volt Amperes Volts Alternating Current Variable Air Volume Engineered or Custom options are available only with extended lead times Introduction efesotomasyon com Resources Available Table of Resources Manuals Installation Guides and CD s TM E7 01 E7 Drive User Manual TM E7 02 E7 Drive Programming Manual TM E7 21 E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual TM E7 22 E7 Metasys N2 Technical Manual TM E7B 01 E7B Drive Bypass Technical Manual TM E7L 01 E7L Drive Bypass Technical Manual IG AFD 20 LonWorks Option Card CM048 Installation Guide IG AFD 50 Pressure Transducer 3 15 PSI a
248. nput is given priority over the multi step speeds 1 Shown for H3 13 0 Main Fref TAT Al and 2 are reversed 1f H3 13 1 Main Fref TA2 Frequency Reference 3 d1 03 Frequency Reference 4 d1 04 Jog Frequency d1 17 2 ON OFF OFF Frequency Reference 2 41 02 or analog input A2T aN Programming 5 39 As shown in Table 5 8 it is possible to use analog inputs place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency Reference 2 Ifbl 01 1 Terminals then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed If b1 01 0 Operator then Frequency Reference 1 will be used If H3 09 2 Aux Reference then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 for the second preset speed If H3 09z2 then Frequency Reference 2 will be used IMPORTANT The programming of d1 01 through d1 04 and d1 17 will be affected by the setting of 01 03 The programming of these parameters will be in the units specified by Display Scaling parameter 01 03 Programming 5 40 d2 Reference Speed Command Limits B 02 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 100 0 B 02 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Setting Range 0 0 to 110 0 Factory Default 0 0 The use of parameters d2 01 and d2 02 places limitations on the speed command that the Drive will accept The parameters are set in units of percentage of the maximum frequen
249. ns Operating with HAND selected Drive mode The Drive can be operated locally from the control panel by first pressing the DRIVE Select key Then pressing the HAND key gives the front panel control of the Drive operation Pressing HAND also provides the run command to the Drive When placed into HAND mode the Drive begins running at the HAND mode speed command Operating with AUTO selected Drive mode The Drive can be operated remotely by pressing the DRIVE Select key Then pressing the AUTO key gives a remote device BAS or DDC control of the Drive In the AUTO mode the Drive will look for a run command contact closure at terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 Speed command signal level and source is determined by the parameter settings and the options present in the unit see Tables 5 1 and 5 2 The AUTO speed command is wired to terminals TB3 3 and TB3 1 Consult Figures 2 5 and 2 6 in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for correct configuration of the speed command analog frequency reference Operating with HAND selected Bypass mode The Bypass can be operated locally from the front control panel by pressing the Bypass Select key In BYPASS mode the Bypass contactor coil can be energized manually by pressing the HAND key In Bypass mode selecting HAND operation causes the motor to run at full speed directly across the line Operating with AUTO selected Bypass mode The Bypass can be operated remotely by pressing the Bypass Select ke
250. ntrol Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer or 4 20 mA applied to Terminal TB5 9 Drive terminal A2 Auto mode run stop command for Drive from serial communication Auto mode run stop command for Bypass from serial communication Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 01 H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Transducer output is 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Drive Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input This set ting also gives terminal A2 priority over 41 02 for preset speed 2 see Programming Manual TM E7 02 H1 02 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A Drive terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2 DIP switch S4 2 must be ON speed input The S4 input closes when H O A Auto H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select 41 01 keypad as the speed command An open contact selects serial com for the run stop command the serial com speed command 15 overridden by the preset speed above This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 02 Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5 2 H5 07 RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicate
251. o 25 0 kVA Braun Ph Loss In Lvl one of the input phases is lost PF Dependent 5 5 fm Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Ground Fault Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Fan On Off Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Fan Delay Time Ambient Temperature Setting Ambient Temp OL2 Characteristic Selection at Low Speeds OL2 Sel L Spd Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA Sel OH Frequency Reference Reduction Level Fref During OH Detection Selection for Fan Failure Detect Sel Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Hunt Prev Gain Enables and disables drive output ground fault detection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Controls the Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation 0 Fan On Run Mode Fan will operate only when drive is running and for L8 11 seconds after RUN is removed 1 Fan Always On Cooling fan operates whenever drive is powered up When L8 10 0 this parameter sets a delay time for Cooling Fan de energization after the run command is removed When the drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating drive overload OL2 protection level is reduced This parameter assists in protecting the output transistor junctions from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 18 15 active Enables and disables software Current Limit A CLA 0 Disabled 1 Enabled
252. o Fault Detection Table 6 3 If Parameter Cannot Be Set Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set B The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Drive is operating Drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Remove the run command and then set the parameters Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B 16 set for a multi function digital input terminal H1 01 to H1 05 If the parameter write enable input is OFF the parameters cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A 1 04 If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A 1 04 OPEO1 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Operator Programming Errors in this chapter and correct the setting B is displayed This 1s a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be f
253. o operate and cut off the power supply Whenever possible use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level 1 a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per unit with an operating time of 0 1 5 or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures 1 one designed for use with Drives It will also help to change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Vibration Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration The application is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the carrier frequency This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation but the machinery vibrates with a high pitched whine To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between an applications characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Drive To prevent this from occurring use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration B Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V f control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by raising the value of C4 02
254. o rapid or if the load is too great Lengthen the acceleration time 01 or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor size B The motor only rotates in one direction Reverse run prohibited may be selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Drive will not receive reverse run commands This is the default to use both forward and reverse operation set b1 04 to 0 and operate in Auto mode The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring is incorrect When the Drive U T1 V T2 and W T3 terminals are properly connected to the motor the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is received The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U TI V T2 and W T3 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Acceleration Level is too low the acceleration time will be too long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Preventio
255. of 60 0 HZ or other desired maximum frequency is obtained otart Up and Operation 4 7 13 14 15 If the circuit breaker option is not present go to step 12 In preparation for testing the Bypass observe the trip setting of the Circuit Breaker The trip point is factory set at the lowest possible setting and must be adjusted for each application This breaker will trip due to inrush current and load inertia unless it is reset e For fan applications adjust the trip setting to ten times motor FLA e For pump applications adjust the trip setting to six times motor FLA If Circuit Breaker tripping 15 experienced at these settings during motor starting on Bypass increase the setting gradually until the motor can be started without Circuit Breaker tripping Press the OFF key and press the BYPASS Select key The Drive will ramp the motor to zero speed then the control will be transferred to Bypass mode Be prepared to monitor the rotation direction of the motor in Bypass operation Bump the HAND key and quickly press the OFF key Check the motor rotation Do not allow the motor to continue operating in Bypass mode until rotation is correct If the rotation direction in Bypass 1s correct skip the rest of this step If not carry out the following corrections 1 Turn OFF the incoming power feed to the E7N unit Since the correct rotation in Drive mode was previously established do not change any output wires
256. of the Drive for Modbus communications This Drive also contains embedded APOGEE FLN and Metasyse 2 communication protocols For details regarding APOGEE FLN please refer to the E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual TM E7 21 For details regarding Metasyse 2 please refer to the Technical Manual TM E7 22 These two documents can be found on the CD ROM included with this Drive and Bypass unit or at www drives com and Serial Communication 2 Using Modbus Communication 3 Modbus Communication Configuration 3 Communication Specifications 3 Communication Connection Terminal 4 Procedure for Setting Up Communication 4 Modbus Function Code Details 8 MOGDUS Data Tabl65 oct en 10 Modbus Self Diagnosis 15 Metasys 2 Point 16 Metasys 2 Analog Input Al Summary 16 Metasys N2 Analog Output AO Summary 17 Metasys 2 Binary Input BI Summary 18 Metasys 2 Binary Output BO Summary 18 Mailbox Function Points
257. ogramming 5 5 Table 5 2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings HAND Speed Drive Terminal A2 Sig Parameters Effected by Options Specified and Settings Command nal Level TB3 3 or Switch S1 Switch S4 H1 02 H1 03 DE 2 xe Las SHES 54 55 CA 01 01 d 02 mA VDC PSIG open ae e ee pops ps pe pere pn p peor AE Lt pepper sce gt EE quee oe ese SA 3 ERC ES ee qe SGC Oe Ul el eet ld ee ANNE Ee gg Jue ee ek HEX e NENNEN EMEN UN 56 E CXETENXLOERNEIEXERENUIDCIME gt tf n xx gt Definitions L LonWorks Option Card The Drive factory default J Native Protocol Metasys N2 The H O A selector keys must have AUTO selected P Pneumatic Interface 3 to 15 PSIG to allow serial com to control the Drive U Native Protocol APOGEE FLN Don t care V Native Protocol Modbus Parameter Reference b1 01 Speed Command Input Source H5 02 Communication Spee
258. ommand input from the DDC and the command IMPORTANT input from multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 Communications D 5 Message Format In Modbus communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The message format 15 configured for both sending and receiving as shown below The length of the data packets is changed by the command function contents Slave address Fig D 4 Message Format The space between messages must support the following DDC to Drive Drive to DDC DDC to Drive Time Seconds 24 bits long _ L 2 5 setting Fig 0 5 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 to 32 If 0 is selected commands from the master will be broadcast 1 the Drive will not return responses Function Code The function code specifies commands There are four function codes as shown below Table D 3 Modbus Function Codes Command Message Response Message Function Min Max Min Max Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 03H Reading Holding Register Contents E up 37 Function Code Hexadecimal 06H Write In Single Holding Register E ae _ 08H Loopback Test ros s qm e 10H Write In Several Holding Registers 25 1 Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message error response message 15 always 5 bytes Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage regis
259. on An open contact causes operation in Drive mode and a closed contact results in Bypass mode Smoke Purge Operation Terminal TB1 5 on the Control PCB A2 15 a dedicated terminal for Smoke Purge operation This function allows a contact closure between terminals 1 5 and 1 9 to transfer motor operation to Bypass for a maximum capacity smoke control function When in smoke purge mode during emergency fire smoke situations the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment Note Smoke purge overrides all other control inputs and selector buttons Smoke purge operation can only be terminated by opening the contact closure at terminal TB1 5 or by opening the disconnect switch 51 on schematic DS E7N 01 Multi Function Digital Inputs The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit is interconnected with the Drive multi function digital input terminals to allow a single customer interface to control both Drive and Bypass circuits As aresult only Drive digital input terminals S6 and S7 are available for other uses Drive Terminals S6 S7 and SN have been brought out to TB5 5 TB5 4 and TB5 2 respectively See Appendix A and Chapter 5 parameter H1 04 and H1 05 for programming instructions efesotomasyon com Electrical Installation 2 17 DIP Switch Programmable Functions Summary TABLE 2 13 DIP Switch Functions DIP SETTINGS FACTORY SWITCH SETTING SERI
260. on is active Sting COPY SELECT factory default READ OP SINV WRITE B 03 02 Read Allowed Selection Sating o Enabled factory default The digital operator has parameter COPY capabilities via built in non volatile memory The digital operator can READ all of the parameters in the Drive and store them for later WRITE back to the Drive or into a Drive with the same product code and software number In order to read the parameter values and store them in the digital operator select 03 02 1 Enabled If you attempt to READ the data which overwrites any previously stored data without first setting 03 02 1 Enabled you will get a PrE error After setting 03 02 1 Enabled it is possible to store parameter values in the digital operator by setting 03 01 1 INV 0OP READ A successful READ of the parameter values will display rEd An error may occur while saving the parameter values to the digital operator s memory If an error 15 displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 To COPY parameter values into a Drive set 03 01 2 OP gt INV WRITE During the writing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display CPy An error may occur while writing the parameter values to the Drive If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter 03 01 It is possible to compare the parameter va
261. ooting 19 If Parameter Cannot Be Set 19 If the Motor Does Not Operate 20 The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed 21 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or I Accelerator E eq Dua ERA di 21 If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command 21 If the Motor Overheats 22 If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by starting or Running Drive 2 21 22 If a Stand Alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Dre IS As 23 If There is Mechanical Vibration 23 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped 24 If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started or Stalls 24 If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command Input 24 Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure 25 Drive Date Stamp Information 29 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 1 E7N Bypass PCB and H O A Control Panel Diagnostics Introduction This section
262. or is removed even if it s not outputting to the motor The reset key on the digital operator will need to be pressed after reconnecting the digital operator to reset the fault and continue normal operation If 02 06 0 Disabled then the Drive will not fault if the digital operator 1s disconnected but the Drive will discontinue motor operation If full Drive operation is required while the digital operator is removed set 02 06 0 Disabled and 02 15 0 Disabled Hand Key Function If both 02 06 and 02 15 are disabled then the digital operator can be disconnected without disturbing Drive operation B 02 07 Cumulative Operating Time Setting Setting Range to 65535 Hours Factory Default 0 Hours 02 08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection Seting PowerOnTime _____ Running Time factory default The Drive features an Elapsed Timer monitor that records in units of hours The Elapsed Timer monitor is U1 13 Parameter 02 08 programs this function to either accumulate elapsed hours based on time the Drive is powered 02 08 0 Power On Time or time the Drive is running 02 08 1 Running Time The Drive is considered running anytime there is an active run command or when the Drive is outputting voltage 1 e including during deceleration Parameter 02 07 allows manual adjustment of the Elapsed Timer primarily to accommodate maintenance or control board replacement in the event of damage To reset th
263. ored in a dedicated location in the memory as User Initialization values think of it as a back up file Table 5 1 is also used to document parameters that have been factory set for convenience to typical values for fan and pump applications These parameters may be changed to meet the needs of the specific application If additional parameters are set to the specific needs of the application project and the system operation has been checked and verified then the User Initialization values should be stored memory again by selecting and entering 1 Set Default in parameter 02 03 When there is a need for re initialization of the user parameters re setting to the User Initialization values of the Bypass unit then a User Initialization function should be carried out by selecting 1110 User Initialize in parameter A1 03 This will re establish the drive set up required for the Bypass application and any user parameter values that have been stored The factory parameter settings required to interface with the bypass logic circuit have also been stored in the digital keypad memory If there is a need for re initialization re setting to a known factory starting point for trouble shooting purposes of the Bypass unit then the back up file in the digital keypad memory can be copied to the drive In parameter 03 01 select 2 gt WRITE to carry out the copy function Pr
264. otor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Drive output Voltage surges are generated by standing waves that can occur with certain combinations of Drive carrier frequency and motor cable length Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Drive s input power supply voltage 1 1200VAC for a 480VAC Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 480VAC Drive use an inverter duty NEMA MGI Parts 30 amp 31 motor Motor protection filter can also be an effective measure If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive B If noise is generated by Drive switching implement the following countermeasures 1 Change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of internal switching Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive s input power terminals Use metal conduit Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Drive and power wires in metal Ground the Drive and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring 2520253 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 22 Stand Alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Drive performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause an external ground fault interrupter t
265. p Hold 7 A C F 10 1 E 17 18 19 Fast Stop N O Com Inv SEL 2 Progiam Lockout Drive Enable Accepe Run Following are descriptions of only those parameters that are required for Bypass operations and PI control 0 31 34 35 36 61 62 64 67 A 70 1 B Function Multi step Ref 1 Setting 3 B Function Multi step Ref 2 Setting 4 The Drive can be programmed to step through four preset speeds and jog It is also possible to mix in the analog inputs as speed references that can be chosen in place of the first and second preset frequency references The selection of which preset speed will be the active speed command 15 determined by the status of the digital inputs set for Multi step Ref 1 1 0 3 and Multi step Ref 2 0 4 Changing the active speed command via the Multi step References can be done while the Drive is running Programming 5 50 The following table details which reference is active based on the status of the Multi step Ref 1 and Multi step Ref 2 inputs Table 5 11 Digital Input Functions Terminal Terminal Terminal Preset Speed Programmed Programmed Programmed as Details as Multi step as Multi step Jog Reference Reference 1 Reference 2 Frequency Reference 1 41 01 or analog input Alt Frequency Reference 4 d1 04 Jog Frequency d1 17 1 Frequency Reference 2 41 02 analog input 21 Determined by
266. peed Search at start is used b3 05 will serve as the lower limit of the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 B b3 14 Bi Directional Speed Search Selection Seting 0 Enabled factory default The b3 14 parameter can be used to turn off the bi directional capabilities of the Speed Estimation form of Speed Search By turning off the bi directional capability the speed search will only try to match the speed in the last known direction Programming 5 22 b5 PI Function The capability to accept an analog signal as feedback for a PI Proportional Integral control function is built into the Drive Speed Command PI Setpoint D1 04 Frequency Reference ii e Sleep function D1 02 cu o2 Selection b5 21 Lo 1 1201 26 16 2 Delay D1 01 eo m b5 01 0 Lo 1 01 i E E POE 5 3 Enable Disable reverse operation when PI output is negative Sleep Level DT Scalin Sleep Function Serial Com 1927 5 5 5 b5 01 3 T 1 34 1 03 Upper limit E 109 1 0 214 01 OFF 0 o PI Differential m s b5 01 1 Output eo o po Fdbk H3 09 16 j 90 frequency ur PI control is OFF under the following ONo 1 Lower limit 0 Terminal 1 conditions 2 PI S n Up
267. per limit selection b5 21 During command inpu Fmax 109 e poin H1 xx 19 and the terminal status is MEMOBUS Reg 06H 10 ON PI target value Reg OFh bit 1 Lower limit j bS i 1 jO PI Set Point PI Input Fmax x109 gt 5 182 V 91 38 91 36 Snooze Function Scaling 1 0 PI Differentialo Sealing Fdbk H3 09 16 b5 20 PI Input Characteristic 1 1 35 delay time Output 0 b5 08 Gain 0 O Q O b5 10 PI Feedback PI SFS 12170 Proportional n pem 0 05 17 Integral Hold b5 A PI Output Integral Reset isti Terminal A1 H1 xx 31 rine Ei Feedback x Differential U1 24 1 Fdbk H3 09 16 5 Scaling Differential 05 20 Fdbk H3 09 16 Le Sleep function b5 28 1 0 3 09 16 selection b5 21 Snooze Function PES b5 30 1 0 O F 2 pow ms Terminal A2 gt Q i e Pl offset 1 05 29 0 or 1o Wake Up i 1 VHP 05 24 output monitor Differential Differential Wake Up Level 01 37 Fdbk H3 09 16 Fdbk H3 09216 Feedback 2 offset 01 53 65 07 Fig 5 13 Block Diagram Bypass units are shipped with the parameters in Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 pre established for the configuration
268. ply can be maintained varies with Drive size The larger the Drive the greater the potential ride thru time If L2 01 2 CPU Power Active the Drive ignores L2 02 and attempts a restart as long as the control power supply 15 still able to maintain a minimal voltage level In effect setting L2 01 2 CPU Power Active factory default is programming the Drive for maximum Power Loss Ride thru An equivalent setting is L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t with L2 02 set to a time longer than the control power supply can be maintained after power 15 lost Note The run command must be held during power loss for any power loss ride thru capability to be possible It 15 for this reason that 3 wire control is not recommended for use with the Momentary Power Loss function Programming 5 60 L3 Stall Prevention B 3 01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel Seting General Purpose factory default Intelligent E L3 02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel Setting Range to 200 of Drive rated output current Factory Default 120 of Drive rated output current The stall prevention during acceleration function adjusts the acceleration time in order to prevent OC fault trips during acceleration If L3 01 0 Disabled stall prevention is disabled If the load is large enough and the acceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 01 1 General Purpose then the standard sta
269. puts Only Outputs e pins 10 14 2 x 120 15 5 e TB2 pins 1 6 2 x 1 20 15 e CN105 pin 1 1 x 120 15 5A e CNIO7 pins 1 and 3 2 x 120 15 5 e CN109 pins 1 and 3 2 x 120 15 5 e CN108 pin 1 1 x 120 15 5A CNIIO pins 1 17 17 x 3 26VDC 25mA CN102 pins 19 26 28 9 x 15 27VDC 10mA e CNI13 pins 2 5 9 13 10 x 3 5VDC 2mA Fusing F101 6 25A 10A max F102 0 25A 3A max Set Up for Maintenance Mode Power down the panel and wait for the Drive keypad display to extinguish Set the DIP switch S2 position 3 referred to as 52 3 from now on to the ON position to activate the system Maintenance Mode Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 2 Testing Test all the fuses in the panel including the two on the bypass control 2 CAUTION In maintenance mode all power or control systems connected to the bypass panel such as motors or controls will be energized for a couple of seconds to allow the wiring to be tested If this is not desirable these wires should be disconnected from the panel prior to any maintenance mode testing Power up the system and verify that for approximately 2 seconds all the LEDs are lit on the H O A keypad If this does not occur the H O A keypad its cable or the Bypass control PCB 1s defective Temporarily swap them one by one with known working components to find the source of the problem This procedure is based on
270. r from the machine Auto tuning is not completed within Er 04 the specified time Resistance The auto tuning result became other than the parameter set range Current flow exceeded the motor rated current Er 12 Current detection value symbol Check current detection circuit I det Circuit was reversed wiring and mounting procedure Any of U TI V T2 and W T3 has open phase Auto tuning did not finish within the Er 13 set time Leakage Inductance Fault Tuning result became other than the parameter setting range Check motor wiring Check input data especially motor output current and motor rated current value End 3 Rated current set value is set too Data Invalid high Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 17 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults These faults can occur occurred during the operator COPY function Fault content is displayed on the operator An error during the COPY function does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output Table 6 7 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action PRE 03 01 was set to 1 to write a parameter when the Digital Operator was gt write protected 03 02 0 Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters with the Digital Operator Repeat the Read Check the Digital Operator cable Replace digital operator RDE An attempted write of a parameter to 2 22 DATA ERROR EEPROM o
271. r Bypass from serial communication Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command source Keypad Operator d1 01 H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch 51 2 must also be OFF H3 09 2 Aux Reference default Drive Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input This setting also gives terminal A2 priority over 41 02 for preset speed 2 see Program ming Manual 7 02 H1 02 3 Multi Step Ref 1 A Drive terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2 speed switch 54 2 must be ON input The S4 input closes when H O A Auto H1 03 6C Com Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1 01 to select d1 01 keypad as the speed command An open contact selects serial com for the run stop command the serial com speed command is overridden by the preset speed above This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H5 02 Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5 2 H5 07 RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5 2 H5 08 Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN B Options J U Vor L and P Serial Communications and Pneumatic Pressure Transducer Bypass with serial communication for run stop control and speed monitoring with pneumatic input for speed co
272. r DECREASE Key pressed to display 01 Acceleration Time 1 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DATA ENTER Key pressed to access setting display The setting of C1 01 30 00 is displayed Shift RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right DECREASE Key pressed to change set value to 20 00 s DATA ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data END 15 displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0 5 s T UJ 11 The monitor display for C1 01 returns Control Panel 3 22 Chapter 4 otart Up and Operation This chapter describes the procedures to prepare for and conduct the E7N Drive and Bypass unit start up Stare Up qt io a bb 2 The Safety Interlock Circuit at Power Up 2 The BAS Interlock Circuit at Power Up 3 Bypass Unit Start Up Preparation 4 Bypass Unit Start Up Procedure 5 Bypass Unit Operation Description 10 Selector Key FUNCIONS 12 DIP Switch Selectable Functions 12 Contact Closure Inputs 14 otart Up and Operation 4 1 Start Up Introduction In order
273. r List Continued Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Description Display Parameter No Setting Range PI Feedback Square Root Factory Menu Setting Location 0 Disabled Programming b5 29 PI Square Root Gain A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback 0 00 to 2 00 1 00 Programmin PI Fb SqRt Gain pier app d 5 0 Disabled Monitor Selection 1 Enabled 0 or Programming PI Out Moni SqRt Sets units for 65 19 U1 24 U1 38 WC InchOfWater PSEIb SqrInch GPM Gallons Min F DegFahrenheit CFM Cubic ft Min CMH Cubic M Hr 0 to 11 2 LPH Liters Hr LPS Liters Sec Bar Bar Pa Pascals 10 C DegCelsius 11 Mtr Meters _ Energy Saving a a aay Energy Saving Control Energy Savings function enable disable selection b8 01 Selection 0 Disabled 0 or 1 Quick Setting Energy Save Sel 1 Enabled Energy Saving Coefficient 0 0 to kVA 58 04 Value 655 00 Denendent Programming Energy Save COEF P b8 05 Power Detection Tier TH Used to fine tune the energy savings function 0 to 2000 20ms Programmin kW Filter Time g g Search Operation Voltage b8 06 Limit 0 to 100 0 Programming Search V Limit IIT Accel IEEE 01 Acceleration Time 1 30 0sec Accel Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency pone Quick Setting 1 02 Deceleration Time 1 0 0 30 0sec Decel Time 1 Sets the time to d
274. r as the speed command source This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H1 04 19 Disable A Drive terminal S6 input contact closure disables PI mode Jumpers required TB5 5 to TB1 12 and TB1 13 to TB5 2 H3 08 0 0 10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0 10 VDC Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be OFF H3 09 B PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control H5 02 Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5 2 H5 07 RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5 2 H5 08 Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected 0 Modbus 1 N2 or 2 FLN Programming 5 28 The analog feedback to the Drive for the PI control is via the Drive A2 terminal The Drive must be programmed H3 09 PI Feedback to use terminal A2 as feedback for the PI functionality of the Drive The PI setpoint can be configured to come from one of many different inputs or parameters The table below describes the options for originating the PI setpoint Table 5 6 PI Setpoint Options Status of The PI Setpoint Status of Modbus Status of will be read from Register b1 01 OFh bit 1 Parameter b5 19 Modbus Register 06H D1 01 Terminal 1 Serial Com Option PCB In some situations there are two feedback inputs Air Handling Unit return fan speed control in a volume matching
275. r capacity is small compared to the Drive s capacity or if the motor stalls during acceleration lower the set value of L3 02 3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration If L3 04 0 Disabled stall prevention 15 disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If L3 04 1 General Purpose then the standard stall prevention function is enabled If during deceleration the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level see table below the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level the deceleration will continue down to the Speed Command level See figure below Table 5 16 Stall Prevention During Decel Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration Drive Voltage V If L3 01 2 Intelligent the intelligent stall prevention is enabled The active deceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3 04 1 General Purpose Programming 5 62 a Set decel time b Decel time is extended Output Frequency DC Bus Voltage 380 660 760 Vdc
276. r is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at D1 04 Enables or disables the communications timout detection function 0 Disabled A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault 1 Enabled If communications is lost for more than the time specified in parameter 5 09 a communi cations fault will occur Enables or disables request to send RTS control 0 Disabled Enabled Selects the communication protocol 0 Modbus 1 N2 Metasys 2 PI APOGEE Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated Works in conjunction with parameters H5 05 and H5 04 Setting Range 0 to FF H5 08 dependent After these parameters are changed Drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect Factory Setting Chapter Ref Menu Location Quick Setting Quick Setting Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the time from when the Drive receives data to 5 to 65 E Bees Transmit WaitTIM when the Drive sends data 5 5 mem Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in 61 01 61 02 1 Monitoring operation status of the Drive Setting and reading Drive parameters 2 3 Resetting faults 4 Input multi function commands An OR operation is performed between the multi function c
277. r the Power PCB 3PCB or the Gate Drive PCB 3PCB The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply 1 Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Ifthe fuse is good the measured value will be zero ohms If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite ohms Output Transistors Q1 Q12 Control Power Fuse Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 27 Table 6 8 Main Circuit Test Procedure Continued The Heat Sink amp Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive 1 Conducta visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely 2 Ifthere is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the fan motor can be checked with a digital mutli meter Set the digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If zero ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor 24Vdc Cooling Fans Heat Sink amp Internal The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the motor can be check
278. ral Devices E 1 Branch Circuit Short Circuit 2 Branch Circuit Overload 3 DEVICES LETS 4 Table of Contents viii Chapter 1 Physical Installation This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving and the installation process for a Drive and Bypass unit Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style 2 lt 3 Bypass Unit 5 eres eter eR 4 Confirmations upon Delivery 5 RECEIVING 5 Nameplate Information 5 Bypass reduct ODUOLFS masse a a ep ERE 7 Bypass Component Descriptions 9 Bypass Unit Front Control Panel 9 Internal Bypass 11 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 15 Dimensions and Weights 02 0 17 Checking and Controlling Installation Site 18 IISA LION SILC TET 18 Controlling the Ambient Temperature
279. ration when L3 0520 a Decel time C1 02 or C1 04 Output Frequency b Active Accel time Output Current Fig 5 33 Time Chart for Stall Prevention Level During Running The L3 06 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current If the Drive still faults when L3 0520 then either lower the L3 06 or adjust the C1 02 or C1 04 settings for a quicker deceleration Programming 5 63 L4 Speed Command Loss Detection B 14 05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Setting 2202 Disabled factory default Enabled of PrevRef 4 06 Frequency Reference at Loss of Frequency Reference Setting Range 0 0 to 100 0 of previous speed command Factory Default 80 0 of previous speed command The Drive can be configured to compensate for the loss of its external speed command An external speed command is considered lost if it drops 90 of its value 400115 or less Frequency Reference Output Frequenc dd TIME Fig 5 34 Loss of Frequency Reference Timing Diagram To enable Frequency loss detection set L4 05 1 Enabled of If Frequency Reference Loss Detection is enabled and the reference 15 lost the Drive continues to operate at the speed commanded by parameter L4 06 When the speed command returns the Drive again follows the speed command Setting H2 01 H2 02 Loss of Ref configures a digital output as a Frequency Reference Loss indication only wh
280. rator and H O A Control Panel Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator and H O A Control Panel Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Digital Operator and H O A Control Panel Keys MENU Key Scrolls from one of the five main menus to the next ESC ESCAPE Key Returns to the display before the DATA ENTER key was pressed INCREASE Key Increases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the next item or data V DECREASE Key Decreases parameter numbers and set values Used to move to the previous item or data HESET Selects the digit to be changed The selected digit will blink Also resets the Drive SHIFT RESET Key when a fault has occurred DATA ENTER Key Pressed to enter menus and parameters as well as to set values Drive Select Key Selects the Drive mode of operation Bypass Select Key Selects the Bypass mode of operation Operates the Drive or Bypass via the local control panel A Run command is automatic OFF Key Removes the Run command Enables the Drive or Bypass to be operated by a remote device such as a DDC or AUTO AUTO Key BAS p Drive Test Key Provides local control of the Drive while the motor is operating in Bypass mode Control Panel 3 3 HAND HAND Key Drive Digital Operator Keypad B Drive Operational Status Indicators The definition of the Drive operational status indicators are shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Drive Operational Status Indicators Lit red when a
281. rent reading is a number where 8192 100 of Drive rated output current H1 Digital Inputs B H1 01 Drive Terminal S3 Function Selection H1 02 Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection H1 03 Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection H1 04 Drive Terminal S6 Function Selection H1 05 Drive Terminal S7 Function Selection Setting Range Oto 6E Factory Default H1 01 70 Bypass Drv Env This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 1 02 This 15 one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 H1 03 This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 2 H1 04 4 Multi Step Ref 2 2 Wire 3 Multi Step Ref 1 3 Wire 1 05 6 Jog Freq Ref 2 Wire 4 Multi Step Ref 2 3 Wire Programming 5 49 The Drive has five multi function contact digital inputs By programming parameters H1 01 through H1 05 the user can assign specific functions to each input Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital input functions The programming manual has a more detailed description of each of the functions Table 5 10 Digital Input Functions setting Function setting Function Option inv Selection 16 Reference Sample Hold Integral Reset Multi Accel Decel 1 External Baseblock N O External Baseblock N C 36 600 Speed Search 3 Accel Decel Ram
282. requency Reference 3 d1 04 Frequency Reference 4 Setting Range 0 00 to E1 04 Value Factory Default d1 01 10 00 Hz d1 02 6 00 Hz 41 03 0 00 Hz d1 04 0 00 Hz 41 01 and 41 02 are special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit See Table 5 1 Output Speed RUN Closed Multi step Open Reference 1 Input Closed Multi step 2 Reference 2 Input 7 Jog Input Fig 5 20 Preset Reference Timing Diagram example B 01 17 Jog Frequency Reference Setting Range 0 00 to 1 04 Value Factory Default 6 00 Hz The Drive can be programmed to utilize digital inputs to change between four presets speeds and a jog speed It 1s a two step process to set the Drive up for preset speeds First 41 01 through 41 04 and d1 17 must be programmed with the desired preset speeds and the desired jog speed respectively Next up to three of the Drive s digital inputs Terminals S3 through S7 need to be programmed via parameters H1 01 to H1 05 and wired to normally open contacts as Multi step Speed Reference 1 Multi step Speed Reference 2 and Jog Frequency Table 5 8 Preset Speed Truth Table Terminal Terminal Terminal Preset programmed as Multi programmed as Multi programmed as Jog Speed step Reference 1 step Reference 2 Reference Details Determined by b1 01 see page 5 12 3 4 5 The Jog Frequency i
283. ress En Serial Com Adr Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Communication Parity Selection H309 Serial Com Sel Stopping Method after Communication Error Serial Fault Sel H5 04 Communication Error Detection Selection Serial Flt Dtct H5 05 T amp RTS Control Selection pos RTS Control Sel Communication Protocol Selection Protocol Select H5 08 Communication Error Detection Time CE Detect Time H5 09 Description Selects the speed command frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed d1 01 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 or Terminal A2 see parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects the run command input source 0 Operator Hand and Off keys on digital oper ator 1 Terminal Contact Closure on Terminal S1 2 Serial Com RS 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected at 2CN Selects Drive station node number address for terminals R R S S Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications Selects the baud rate for terminals R R 5 and S 0 1200 Baud 1 2400 Baud 2 4800 Baud 3 9600 Baud 4 19200 Baud Selects the communication parity for terminals R R 5 and S 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication erro
284. returns within the time set in L2 02 2 CPU Power Active Drive will restart if power returns prior to internal power supply shut down In order for a restart to occur the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period Determines the power loss ride thru time This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive Only effective when L2 01 1 Used to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on After a power loss if L2 03 is greater than L2 02 operation resumes after the time set in L2 03 The time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V f pattern after speed search current detection mode is complete Sets the drive s DC Bus undervoltage trip level If this is set lower than the factory setting additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary Parameters A 19 T Setting 0 to 1 0 1 to 20 0 0 to 3 0 to 2 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting p Motor Overload NET 3 1 Menu Location Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming 0 0 to 25 5sec 0 1 to 5 0sec 0 0 to 5 0sec Voltage Class Dependent 2 kVA Dependent kVA Dependent kVA Dependent Voltage Class Dependent Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Parameter No L3 01 L3 02 L3 04 L3 05 L3 06 Parameter Name LCD Digital Operator Display Stall Pr
285. ripping Parameter b2 04 can be used to resist any residual motion of the load after the deceleration has finished Output Frequency pe nection I 1 b2 03 b2 04 Fig 5 7 DC Injection Braking During Starting and Stopping Parameter b2 04 also serves the function of affecting the length of time DC Injection to stop b1 03 2 DC Injection to Stop will occur B b2 09 Motor Pre Heat Current Setting Range to 100 Factory Default 0 A DC current can be circulated within the motor windings while the motor is stopped The current will produce heat within the motor and prevent condensation Parameter b2 09 determines the percentage of Drive rated output current that will be used for the motor pre heat function This function can be useful in applications where the motor sits for extended periods of time in humid conditions Motor pre heating can only be initiated by closing a digital input programmed as a Motor Pre heat Input H1 0x 60 Check with the motor manufacturer to determine the maximum acceptable current level the motor can withstand when stopped Be sure not to exceed the motor manufacturers recommended level Programming 5 18 b3 Speed Search The Speed Search function allows the Drive to determine the speed of a motor shaft that 15 being driven by rotational inertia Speed Search will allow the Drive to determine the speed of the already rotating motor and begin to ramp the motor to a set speed without first having
286. rive Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive Maintenance 7 4 Drive Models 4030 40 HP and above 480 V A cooling fan assembly is attached to the top inside the Drive The cooling fan assembly includes the heat sink cooling fans and the internal cooling fan The cooling fan s can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel B Removing the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly 2 Remove the terminal cover Drive cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Drive 3 Remove the Control PCB bracket 1f necessary to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board 13 PCB positioned near the top of the Drive 4 Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate Drive board 3PCB positioned at the back of the Drive Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly B Mounting the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive Air flow direction Fan Cover Control PCB bracket Control PCB
287. rives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for Technical Support Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website www yaskawa com When calling for technical support please have the following materials available e The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps e list with your parameter settings e sketch of the electrical power train from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www yaskawa com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guid
288. rmal heat dissipation When preparing to mount the unit lift it by the base or lifting rings when provided never by the enclosure door For effective cooling and proper maintenance the wall mounted units must be installed on a flat non flammable vertical surface using four mounting screws For all units the Disconnect handle should be in the OFF position to open the enclosure door The wall mount units have two full turn fasteners CCW to open that require a flat blade screwdriver to open the enclosure door Physical Installation 1 19 Notes Physical Installation 1 20 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation This chapter describes wiring and the electrical installation process for a Drive and Bypass unit Termination Configuration Power Wiring 2 Field Wiring Pressure Wire Connector Wire Type Range and Tightening Torque Specifications 3 Cable Length between Drive and Motor 4 METEO NE T m 5 WIE ROUINO 6 E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 VAC 7 E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC 7 irc 8 Bypass Field Control Wire Landing 8 Annu fclauon CONTACTS 9 Building Automation System Run Stop Circuit
289. round DCCT defective current Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the DCCT reading Check the motor for a phase to ground short Open phase on the output on deque Check output voltage Output Phase Loss LF Drive output has an open phase or the motor Output Pha Loss no load current is below the setting of Loose terminal screws at T or T3 Tighten the terminal screws parameter E2 03 Parameter E2 03 set Adjust E2 03 to a lower value incorrectly Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 9 Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Ensure the values in L6 02 Loss of Load Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than Motor is underloaded Loss of Load Det 1 dete Check application machine status to eliminate fault Remove the motor and run the Shorted Drive output phase to Drive without the motor Check the motor for a phase to rotor load too heavy accel decel time too short contactor on the Drive output s opened Check the Drive for a phase to Over Current overcurrent detection level approximately 180 of Drive output current and closed a special motor phase short at the output t ith a FLA rati Verify 1 01 02 set larger than Drive rated output correctly current
290. rs are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address will become invalid Error code 02H IMPORTANT Communications D 13 B Error Codes The following table shows Modbus communication error codes Table D 8 Error Codes Error Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access 15 not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message 15 not No of packets x 2 Data setting error Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Attempting to write via Enter commands during run e Attempting to write parameters other than A 1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when CPF03 defective EEPROM fault has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV fault Wrting parameters to the Drive during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via Enter commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Dr
291. ry default Enabled When the Energy Savings function 1s enabled b8 01 1 Enabled the Drive reduces the output voltage to the motor below the voltage value specified by the programmed V f pattern whenever the motor load 15 light Since torque 15 reduced during this voltage reduction the voltage has to return to normal levels when the load returns The energy savings is realized through improved motor efficiency The reduced output voltage causes increased rotor slipping even with a light load A motor is most efficient when operating fully loaded 1 e operating at rated slip b8 04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Setting Range 0 0 to 655 0 Factory Default Model Dependent Parameter 58 04 15 used in maximizing motor efficiency The factory setting will be Drive capacity dependent but can be adjusted in small amounts while viewing the kW monitor U1 08 and running the Drive to minimize the output kW A larger value typically results in less voltage to the motor and less energy consumption Too large a value will cause the motor to stall Programming 5 37 C1 Accel Decel B C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Seconds Factory Default 30 0 Seconds C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum speed E1 04 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 sets the time to decelerate from maximum speed to zero
292. ry to be a manual reset device requiring operator attention if an overload trip out 1s experienced Output Contactor Bypass Contactor Reset Button Overload Relay OverLoad Adjustment Dial Circuit Breaker Adjustment Dial Fig 4 1 Typical Motor Overload and Contactors start Up and Operation 4 5 3 Adjustment Dial Test Button Reset Button Fig 4 2 Overload Relay Detail IMPORTANT To maintain overcurrent short circuit and ground fault protection the manufacturer s instructions for setting the motor OLR must be followed Apply power to the Drive and Bypass package Using a VOM ensure that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the system being set up When power is applied to the E7N unit the control logic will briefly lt 3 seconds self test all the control panel operating mode LEDs located on the lower half of the control panel Then the SEQ and REF LEDs red DRIVE menu LED red STOP LED red Control Power LED green Ready LED green Drive Select LED green and OFF LED amber will be lit when the Drive and Bypass are ready for operation The alpha numeric display will show input frequency speed command at power up Note If the Motor LED red is lit press the reset button on the motor overload relay Various menus are directly available by pressing the MENU key see Chapter 3 When in the DRIVE menu the Drive can accept a run command from local Hand mode
293. s In Lvl 02 04 Drive kVA Selection Inverter Model Capacity Related Parameters B 3 Capacity Related Parameter Values The following tables detail the factory default settings for the parameters that are affected by the setting of parameter 02 04 Table B 3 208 VAC Drives Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Drive Model Nominal Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default CIMR __ _ for for for for for for for for for for b8 04 6 02 2 01 2 03 2 05 2 02 2 03 2 04 1 8 02 1 8 06 2 ms pem 33 35 c 75 s eme wr e mu wm 97 nz om us m p es pre 56 pz 28 o a Note b8 04 Energy Savings Coefficiant p 2 25 C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters B 4 Table B 4 480 VAC Drives Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Drive Model Nominal Default Default Default Default Defa
294. s wired between terminals TB5 2 and 5 5 if using Drive terminal 56 or TB5 2 and 5 4 if using Drive terminal 57 Terminal S6 is not available if utilizing the PI function H1 04 if using Drive terminal S6 or H1 05 if using Drive terminal S7 is programmed for Reverse Jog 13 41 17 is programmed for the desired reverse jog speed b1 04 is programmed for 0 reverse enable When the contact is closed the motor will run in reverse at the speed programmed in d1 17 B b1 07 Local Remote Run Selection Seting __ Run Accept Extrn Run factory default When the Drive is switched between the Local Hand mode the digital operator to the Remote Auto mode by the Hand Off Auto selector there is the possibility that a Run command is already present i e a contact closure between terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Parameter b1 07 determines whether the Drive will Ignore the external Run command until it is removed and re instated b1 07 0 Cycle Extern Run OR Accept the already present Run command and immediately begin acceleration to the commanded speed b1 07 1 Accept Extrn Run When switching from local mode to Auto mode when b1 07 1 Accept Extrn Run the Drive may start IMPORTANT unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between local mode and Auto mode Programming
295. sing parameter E1 03 the programmer can select one of the preset V f patterns or chose between a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit E1 03 F Custom V F and a custom V f pattern without a voltage limit E1 03 FF Custom w o limit Programming 5 44 Table 5 9 Preset V f Patterns EN Specifications 1 03 V f Pattern 1 Specifications 1 03 Pattern 1 High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High Starting Torque 1 60Hz Saturation High Starting Torque 2 a High 50Hz Saturation 7 Starting Torque 2 N o E 5 T S Variable Torque 120Hz D Variable Torque 2 High Speed Operation 01530 60 120 7 Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque Variable Torque 2 If one of the custom V f patterns 15 selected then parameters E1 04 through E1 13 will determine the V F pattern Table 5 9 is for 240V class units only for 480V class units multiply the voltage values by 2 When a factory Initialization is performed the setting of E1 03 is unaffected but the settings of E1 04 through IMPORTANT E 1 13 are returned to their factory default settings B E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 120 0 Hz Factory Default 60 0 Hz Programming 5 45 B 1 05 Maximum Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 208V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models
296. t Fault Output Current U2 07 Output Voltage at Most Recent Fault Output Voltage U2 08 DC Bus Voltage at Most Recent Fault DC Bus Voltage U2 09 Output Power at Most Recent Fault Output kWatts Input Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 11 for U1 10 Input Term Sts Output Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as for U1 11 Output Term Sts Drive Operation Status at Most Recent Fault The format is the same as U2 13 for U1 12 Inverter Status U2 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Elapsed time Note Fault trace is not executed at CPF00 01 CPF03 UVI and UV2 Parameters A 28 Fault History List Table A 4 Fault History List Fault History Most Recent Fault U3 02 214 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 2 3 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 3 th U3 04 4 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 4 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault U3 05 Elapsed Time 1 Cumulative Operation Time at 244 Most Recent Fault U3 06 Elapsed Time 2 Cumulative Operation Time at 374 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 3 Cumulative Operation Time at 4th Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 4 5th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 5 6 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 6 7 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 7 81 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 8 9th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 9 108 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 10 Cumulative Operation Time
297. t Option Card AI 010 Installation E7B Drive Bypass System with Touchpad Control Panel Option T or Y Installation Guide IG E7 03 E7 Drive Wiring Installation Guide CD E7 01 CD ROM Drives for Building Automation SW DW 14 DriveWizard6 1 DriveWizard Software Version 6 1 E7 ESP Energy Savings Predictor for E7 Drives SW E7HET 01 IG E7B 02 E7 Harmonic Estimating Tool Flyers Bulletins Price Book And Specifications FL E7 01 Flyer E7 Drives 1 2 to 500 HP FL E7 02 Flyer E7 18 Pulse Drive FL E7 03 Flyer Building Automation Products FL E7 04 Flyer E7B Drive Bypass System 1 2 to 500 HP EL ETL OI Flyer E7L Drive Bypass System 1 2 to 60 HP BL E7 01 Bulletin multi page E7 Drives and Bypass Packages BL E7 02 Bulletin Significant Cost Savings HVAC Drives for Buildings BL E7N 01 Bulletin multi page E7N Narrow Bypass Package shown actual size E7 DRG Binder E7 Drive Resource Guide PB E7 01 Price Book E7 Drives and E7 Packages SG E7 01 section 15172 Mechanical Engineering Specifications SG E7 10 E7 Drive Mechanical Submittal Specification SG E7B 10 E7B Drive Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with 22mm Operators SG E7B 11 E7B Drive Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with Touchpad and LED Keypad SG E7B 12 E7B Drive Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with Touchp
298. t can be temporarily increased to create an overshoot of the intended PI Setpoint The temporary boost is determined by the PI Setpoint Boost Setting b5 25 Once the temporary boost level 1s reached or the PI Maximum Boost Time 55 26 is exceeded the Drive output shuts off snoozes and the intended PI Setpoint returns From this point on the Snooze Function operates normally and the Drive output returns when the feedback level drops below b5 24 See Figure 5 19 on the following page Programming 5 35 B 65 26 Maximum Boost Time Setting Range 0 to 3600 Seconds Factory Default 0 Seconds Associated with the Snooze Function In cases where the temporary PI Setpoint intended PI setpoint PI Setpoint Boost cannot be reached within the PI Maximum Boost Time b5 26 the Setpoint Boost is interrupted and the Drive output 1s turned off lt lt 05 26 Output i b5 22 Setpoint 5 23 Feedback m ps 5 24 55 23 Snooze or J oN OFF Function TIME Either PI Feedback reaches the new boosted setpoint value or the maximum boost time b5 26 is reached Fig 5 19 Snooze Function Operation B b5 27 PI Snooze Feedback Level Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Default 60 This is a second method of initiating the Snooze Function If the PI feedback level exceeds the PI Snooze Feed
299. tatus area of the front control panel if a normally closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on A2 This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start up 1 Install an NC Safety Circuit between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 1 and TB1 9 on A2 This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be added later in the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch 52 7 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system otart Up and Operation 4 2 The BAS Interlock Circuit at Power Up When a Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode the E7N will display a red Damper Bas LED in the System Status area of the front control panel This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start up 1 Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 2 Install a jumper between TB1 3 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will be added later the installation 3 De activate these terminals by moving DIP switch 52 8 to the ON position toward the enclosure door This solution is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be
300. ter address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Communications D 6 Error Check Errors are detected during communication using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communication 15 typically zero but when using the Modbus system set the factory setting to one e g set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages Communications D 7 Modbus Function Code Details Reading Holding Register Contents 03H Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive Response Message During Error Slave Address Response Message During Normal Operation Slave Address Command Message Slave Address Address EHE HH Data quantity NW Error code 03H Higher FIH register 65H Next storage Next storage i nid Next storage EBD
301. the PI Feedback level with the digital operator Function PI Differential Setting 16 Normal PI operation will adjust the Drive output in order to match the measured feedback value to a desired setpoint When PI is operated in the differential mode however the Drive output 1s adjusted in order to maintain a desired differential between two feedback signals When the A2 analog input is configured as a PI Differential H3 09 16 PI Differential the Al analog input becomes the other PI Differential input The desired differential is set by parameter b5 07 PI Differential Setpoint and can be set so that A2 is held less than b5 07 lt 0 or A2 is held greater than Al b5 07 gt 0 When PI Differential operation 15 chosen the A1 feedback level can be monitored by U1 24 PI Feedback and the A2 feedback level can be monitored by U1 53 PI Feedback2 Programming 5 57 B H3 10 Drive Terminal 2 Gain Setting Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 0 B H3 11 Drive Terminal A2 Bias Setting Setting Range 100 0 to 100 0 Factory Default 0 0 Parameters H3 10 and H3 11 perform the same function for the A2 analog input that parameters H3 02 and H3 03 perform for the A1 analog input Please refer to the parameter description for H3 02 and H3 03 for information about H3 10 and H3 11 These parameters could be used for final calibration of a factory or field installed pressure to electric transducer input connecte
302. the V F pattern Review the V F pattern Motor Overloaded aV Fully adjustable from parameter E2 01 is high parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 Motor rated current setting 15 Check the motor rated current improper value in E2 01 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 10 Description Cause Corrective Action Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action The load is too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time is too short at the size of the load as well as the 012 accel decel time times set in C1 01 and 02 Inv Overloaded Designed to protect the Drive The voltage of the V F pattern Review the V F pattern is high parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 The size of the Drive is small Change to a larger size Drive Ensure the values in L6 02 and OL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor is overloaded Overtorque Det 1 the tiite in T 6 03 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Digital Operator Connection Fault rator The digital operator is not Y OPR The Drive will stop if the digital operator is Check the digital operator attached or the digital opera Oper Disconnect ive 1 i p removed when the Drive is commanded to tor connector v broken run through the digital operator Verify the setting of 02 06 Check the input circuit and reduce th
303. the parameter specified in AO 31 When this point is written to it will write the value to the Drive An ENTER or ACCEPT command does not need to be sent for the data to be taken by the Drive The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator If the Drive is running there are a lim ited number of Drive parameters that can be written to Example Writing a value of 387 183 hex to AO 31 specifies Drive parameter b1 04 Writing a value of 1 to AO 32 enables the Drive for reverse run Communications D 19 APOGEE FLN Point Database APOGEE FLN Point List Summary This database 1s for APOGEE FLN Application 2721 and features 97 logical points 29 Logical Analog Inputs LAI 35 Log ical Analog Outputs LAO 19 Logical Digital Inputs LDI and 14 Logical Digital Outputs LDO These points configure control or monitor the operation of the Drive Information to consider when referencing this table 1 Points not listed are not used in this application 2 Asingle value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units 3 Point numbers that appear in brackets e g 03 can be unbundled at the field panel Point Point Point N IESU Default Engr Units Slope Intercept On Off Number Type SUA Nelle SI Units SI Units SI Units SI Units Text Text Parameter ow o me _ 6 ia o mz oor tar
304. the setting of parameter b1 12 Programming 5 59 L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Function When momentary power loss recovery is enabled L2 0140 a speed search is executed to catch the potentially spinning motor shaft This speed search will occur regardless of the setting of b3 01 Speed Search Selection B 2 01 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection Seng 0 Disi Pwr Ride That CPU Power Active factory default E 1 2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time Setting Range 0 0 to 25 5 Seconds Factory Default Model Dependent The Drive allows different responses to momentary power losses The setting of L2 01 determines whether the Drive attempts to restart after a short loss of incoming AC power and for what length of time this capability remains active If L2 01 0 Disabled the Drive detects a UV1 fault 155 after power loss and automatic restarting is disabled The Drive cannot restart until the external run command is removed and the UV1 fault is reset If L2 01 1 PwrL Ride Thru t the Drive restarts without the UV1 fault if power is returned within the time specified in L2 02 the Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time During the power loss but before the fault trip the digital operator will display a UV alarm If L2 02 is set for a time longer than the control power supply can be sustained a UV1 fault will not occur and the Drive restarts upon the return of AC power The time that the control power sup
305. tial for loose wires after shipment and to control factory costs The operating elements are located on PCB A3 mounted to the inside of the enclosure door and ribbon cable connected to the control logic PCB A2 The control logic PCB A2 is mounted to the left hand side of the enclosure and contains the control circuit field wiring termi nal strips through TB5 B Drive Bypass logic interlocks explained The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit 15 interconnected with the Drive multi function digital input terminals and multi function digital output terminals to allow a single customer interface to control both Drive and Bypass circuits These Drive terminals are therefore not available for other field use field control connections are landed at terminal strips TB1 through 5 on control logic A2 PCB Jumpers explained J1 is a field configuration jumper to allow the user to select the internal 120 VAC power supply a customer supplied 120 VAC power supply or a customer supplied 24 VDC power supply for the digital inputs J2 and J3 are field configuration jumpers to allow the user to select the signal level 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA for the two analog output signals Physical Installation 1 12 B DIP Switch Selectable Functions The DIP switches used to select these functions are located on the logic controller Printed Circuit Board PCB A2 See Figure 1 9 The factory default is shown on the wiring diagram in Chapter 2
306. tic signal input range Option U Enable Embedded Serial Communications A no cost option The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communications via one of 3 embedded protocols Specifying option U will enable the Siemens APOGEE protocol and provide the necessary parameter settings and wiring jumpers to be network ready when delivered Project specific 5 parameters are setup by the user Option V Enable Embedded Serial Communications A no cost option The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communications via one of 3 embedded protocols Specifying option U will enable the Modbus protocol and provide the necessary parameter settings and wiring jumpers to be network ready when delivered Project specific 5 0 parameters are setup by the user Physical Installation 1 7 Option 3 DC Bus Reactor Attenuates harmonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current bus reactor is wired to the Drive 1 and 2 DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 3 input reactor This option is only used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component 25 HP and below 208 VAC 25 HP and 30 HP and below 480 VAC Option Y LCD Keypad Offers 5 lines of display with 16 characters on each line for expanded data presentation capability in English or other language format Option 7 5 DC Bus Reactor Attenuates h
307. ting Range 50 to 130 C Factory Default 95 C 8 03 Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection Seting Ramp to Stop Decel Time C1 02 Coast to Stop Fast Stop Decel Time C1 09 Alarm Only OH Alarm and Reduce factory default The Drive is capable of warning the operator of an impending heatsink over temperature fault via an OH pre alarm The level at which the pre alarm will activate 1s determined by the setting of parameter L8 02 Measurement of the heatsink temperature is done with several strategically mounted thermistors If any of the heatsink thermistors measure a temperature in excess of the setting of L8 02 the Drive will fault OH2 and either ramp to stop using the C1 02 deceleration rate L8 03 0 Ramp to Stop coast to stop L8 03 1 Coast to Stop ramp to stop using the C1 09 fast stop deceleration rate 1 8 03 2 Fast Stop alarm OH and continue running L8 03 3 Alarm Only alarm OH and continue running but at a reduced speed L8 03 4 Alarm amp Reduce If L8 03 4 Alarm and Reduce the Drive will continue to run but will reduce the speed to the level determined by parameter L8 19 Refer to the description for parameter L8 19 If a digital output is configured for OH Prealarm H2 01 20 OH PreAlarm it will close whenever the heatsink tempera ture is greater than the L8 02 level no matter what the setting 1s of L8 03 8 10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Satin
308. tion Frequency Reference Level at Loss Frequency Number of Auto Restarts Attempts Maximum Restart Time After Fault Torque Detection Selection 1 Torque Detection Level 1 Torque Detection Time 1 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time User Monitor Selection LCD Brightness Adjustment Second Line User Monitor Selection Third Line User Monitor Selection Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list Number This parameter s menu location 15 Quick Setting when b5 01 1 and Programming when b5 01 0 Control Panel 3 17 ADV Programming Menu This menu is used to set read every parameter in the Drive Follow the key operations below to access the Programming Menu Example Operations Key operations in advanced programming menu are shown in the following figure Menu Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display mm ENTER RESET Advanced Programming Menu Setup settings A1 xx 81 00 NOH e o 5 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY EJ Myo E VIA IA Control mode selection PID control b5 xx EX ENTER 1 1 1 1111 V 4 4 A Proportional gain DATA E VIL VIA Torque limits L7 xx 4 _ 1 m Non V 4 4 A Reverse torque limit uc Ay Reverse regenerative torque limit DATA cal ENTER RESET 2 rH OITU NO
309. tion Card Fault Option card A D converter fault Noise or spike on the commu nication line defective option board Self diagnosis Fault of Communication Option Card Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board Communication Option Card Code Number Fault Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 8 Corrective Action Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the control board Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the Drive Replace the Drive Remove all inputs to the option board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the option board Replace the Control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power off and on to the Drive Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove any option boards Cycle power off and on to the Drive Perform a factory initialization Replace the option board Replace the control board Table 6 3 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Remove power to the Drive Connect the option board once An option board is not more
310. tion method of Speed Search is to be used then Auto tuning must be performed prior to IMPORTANT using Speed Search If the length of cable between the Drive and motor is ever changed after Auto tuning then Auto tuning should be performed again IMPORTANT The speed estimation mode cannot be used when there are multiple motors operated by one Drive or the motor is two or more frames smaller than the standard size motor per the Drive capacity Programming 5 19 power supply ON OFF Start using Set frequency speed detected Output frequency Output current LEE 4 E 410 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 75 1 lt gt 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency 2 immediately before the baseblock 2 After AC power supply recovery the motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 5 8 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time AC power supply oe Start using speed detected J gt Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current ee gt 4 4 5 10 ms Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Note If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply off time is long operation may be the same as the search in case 1 Fig 5 9 Speed Search Estimated Speed Method
311. to bring it to a complete stop When a momentary loss of supply power is experienced the Drive output is turned off This results in a coasting motor When power returns the Drive can determine the speed of the coasting motor and start without requiring it to be brought to minimum speed Speed Search can be programmed to always be active by setting b3 01 or it can be commanded by remote contact closure by setting a digital input There are two forms of Speed Search in the Drive the speed estimation method and the current detection method When setting the Drive for remote Speed Search input via a contact closure the method of Speed Search is determined by the setting of b3 01 If b3 01 0 SpdsrchF Disable then the remote input will initiate speed estimation method and if b3 01 2 Spdsrchl Disable then the remote input will start the current detection method IMPORTANT Parameters L2 03 and L2 04 also affect the current detection method of Speed Search operation B b3 01 Speed Search Selection Seting SpdsrchF Disable SpdsrchF Enable SpdsrchI Disable factory default Spdsrchl Enable Speed Estimation Method b3 01 0 or 1 The speed estimation method will calculate the speed using measurements of residual motor fields The speed estimation version is bi directional and will determine both the motor speed and direction To enable speed estimation Speed Search at start set b3 01 1 SpdsrchF Enable If the speed estima
312. to provide you with the most reliable Drive and Bypass unit available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure Please complete the checklist in this document and maintain it in a secured location Should you have a need to contact Yaskawa in the future technical service personnel may request information from this document A CAUTION Procedures within this document assume that start up is being accomplished by a Yaskawa authorized service person who has training on the product and is capable of working through the detailed steps with power applied to the Bypass unit while the enclosure door is open Start Up Date Start Up Location Start Up Person Company Name Phone Number Signature Sales Order Number E7N Unit Tag Number Drive Model Number Drive Serial Number In this Start Up chapter when referring to the keypad display the complete description of the parameter setting choices are presented for clarity purposes For example one of the setting choices for parameter b1 02 is 1 terminals Keep in mind that on the standard LED keypad display only the number of the choice will be shown The optional LCD keypad display 15 required to see the complete description IMPORTANT INFORMATION The Safety Interlock Circuit at Power Up On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System S
313. to the A2 analog input E7N Terminal TB3 3 or TB5 9 The A2 analog input can accept either a 0 10 Vdc or 4 20 mA signal as a reference The E7N also has a DIP switch S1 on the PCB A2 that must be set for the proper reference signal into the A2 analog input The S1 2 DIP switch setting determines the internal resistance of the Drive A2 input while parameter H3 08 determines how the Drive interprets the measured signal uum 5 ITTUTITT a LX w qup Fi 1 Ti 1 ETT S E PY iu 7 3 e IS n 5 i Jt E EE Location of 51 ME gt 27 Bae E qu E d dg 414404145 4 m E ga lom ee a iex AL il n ie up IF DIP Switch 51 example Fig 5 28 DIP Switch 1 Table 5 15 DIP Switch 51 2 Setting OFF 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 ON 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 0 Factory default Programming 5 56 B H3 09 Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection H3 09 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit
314. tor FLA current or less For this reason the Drive output contactor has a lower current rating than the Bypass contactor The Bypass contactor is exposed to motor inrush current LRA when starting the motor across the line and therefore requires a higher current rating B OverLoad Relay The OverLoad Relay OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel depending on rating just above the Bypass contactor see Figure 1 7 Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit the adjustable thermal OLR provides overload protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes The Bypass three phase output power connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the overload relay The OLR is set up in the factory to be a manual reset device requiring operator attention if an overload trip out 15 experienced B Control Power Transformer A Control Power Transformer CPT is provided to power the Bypass 120 VAC control circuit The VA capacity 1s determined by the control circuit and optional functions specified for the unit The CPT primary is fused in both legs the secondary is fused when required by NEC transformer VA and wire size dependent One side of the transformer secondary is grounded to the Bypass enclosure B Electronic Bypass Control Logic Operating elements such as indicating LEDs and selector buttons as well as the control logic have been incorporated into a PCB assembly to eliminate the poten
315. tor Overhauling load extended cycle RH dynamic braking duty cycle DynBrk Resistor 109 uid dynamic Drame defective dynamic braking resistor based on setting of L8 01 Monitor DC bus voltage Replace dynamic braking resistor Cycle power off and on to the Shorted dynamic braking Drive RR Dynamic Braking Transistor transistor high DC bus DynBrk Transistr The dynamic braking transistor failed voltage defective dynamic braking resistor Replace defective dynamic braking transistor or resistor Monitor DC bus voltage Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within DC Bus Undervoltage specifications ee ve eee The acceleration time is set too DC Bus Undervolt 208 240 Trip point is lt 190Vdc e Extend the time in C1 01 480VAC Trip point is 380Vdc Voltage fluctuation of the input Cliecistieim uc ose power is too large Cycle power off and on to the Drive Low input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 Control Power Supply Undervoltage External load connected CTL PS Undervolt Undervoltage of the control circuit when pulling down the Drive power running supplies Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Remove all control wiring and test Drive Cycle power off and on to the Drive Contacts on the soft charge Soft Ch Circuit Fault UV3 contactor are dirty and the soft Check the condition of the soft MC Ans
316. tor data can only be read Table D 5 Monitor Data id Fault details adl OOOO Bir m Bit Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 power loss Missing output phase LF Bit E Modbus communications error CE Data link status 0022H 0026H Output current 002AH Not used Communications D 11 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Register No Contents Sequence input status Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 002BH Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bits 7 to F Drive status Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 002CH Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit A Bit B Bit C Bit D Bit E Bit F Multi function digital output status Bit 0 Multi function digital output 1 terminal 1 2 1 ON 0 OFF 002DH Bit 1 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Not used Bits 3 to F Not used Not used Main circuit DC voltage Not used PI feedback level Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 1 without sign PI input level 100 Max output frequency 10 1 with sign PI output level 100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign CPU software number Input terminal S1 1 ON 0 OFF Input terminal S2 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function digital input terminal S3 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function digital input terminal 54 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function digital input terminal S5 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function digital input terminal S6 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function d
317. tput This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed and the digital output is energized Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi function digital output This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened PI Control This parameter enables disables the closed loop PT controller 0 Disabled 1 Enabled commanded speed becomes PI setpoint 3 Fref PI b5 02 Proportional Gain Setting 0 00 to Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller 25 00 2 00 55 03 Integral Time Setting Sets the integral time for the PI controller A setting of zero 0 0 to 360 0 PI I Time disables integral control Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator Set as a of fmax Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PI controller Set as a of fmax Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PI controller Setasa of fmax The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses Parameter b5 07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop 1 Parameter b5 07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non Differential PI loop Every time the PI output is updated the offset is summed with the PI output This can be used to artificially kick start a slow starting PI loop 2 If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulat
318. ts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www yaskawa com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa 1s a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 6 Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault the fault information is displayed on the digital operator the fault contact closes and the motor coasts to stop However a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected Ifa fault occurs take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause To restart reset the fault with any of the following procedures Turn ON the fault reset signal Set 14 Fault Reset to a multi function digital input H1 01 to H1 05 Press the RESET key of the digital operator e Shut off the Drive input power once and then turn on again The Run Command Start Command needs to be removed prior to resetting a fault Resetting a fault by WARNING ting the Drive removing and reapplyi
319. ts source of speed command and sequence Closed Option Card Open b1 01 amp b1 02 60 Motor Preheat Applies current to create heat to avoid condensation Closed Apply amount of current as set in parameter b2 09 61 Speed Search 1 When closed as a run command is given drive does a speed searchstartingatmaximumfrequency E1 04 currentdetection 62 Speed Search 2 When closed as a run command is given drive does a speed search starting at speed command current detection 64 Speed Search 3 When opened the Drive performs a baseblock motor coasts When closed the Drive performs Speed Search from set frequency 67 Com Test Mode Used to test RS 485 422 interface 68 High Slip Braking Closed Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run command status 69 Jog2 Closed Drive runs at speed command entered into parameter d1 17 Direction determined by fwd rev input 3 wire control Only 6A Drive Enable Closed Drive will accept run command Open Drive will not run If running drive will stop per b1 03 Run Command must be cycled Com Inv Sel Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence Closed Serial Communication R R S S Open b1 01 amp 51 02 Com Inv Sel 2 Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence Closed b1 01 amp b1 02 Open Serial Communication R R S S Auto Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection Closed Auto Open Hand Hand Mode Sel Hand Auto Selection C
320. ture Ambient operating humidity Storage temperature Application site Altitude Vibration Appraisal Agencies Table C 3 Common Drive Specifications Specification Sine wave PWM V f control 40 1 2 to 3 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Digital references 0 01 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C Analog references 0 1 77 F 50 F 25 C 10 C Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog references 0 025 50 Hz 10 bit with sign 0 10 4 20 mA 0 0 to 6000 0 s 2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Restarting for momentary power loss bi directional speed search overtorque detection 5 preset speeds acceleration deceleration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence auto tuning cooling fan ON OFF con trol torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PI control with sleep function energy saving control Modbus communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Provides an alternate connection for the motor to line power for operation at full speed only directly from line power Three electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive when operating in Bypass mode Control logic cir cuit provides Hand Off Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks Includes fused 120VAC control transformer motor circuit protector disconne
321. ult Default Default Default Default Default CIMR __ _ for for for for for for for for for b8 04 C6 02 E2 01 E2 03 E2 05 L2 02 L2 03 L2 04 L8 02 1 Hp oe mas ow 15 5 0 ww o ss wm Note 68 04 Energy Savings Coefficiant 7 2 2 3 4 WE uM MEN fn 5 14088 265 NE NM 9 C6 02 Carrier Frequency E2 01 Motor Rated Current E2 03 Motor No Load Current E2 05 Motor Line to Line Resistance L2 02 Momentary Power Loss Ride Thru Time L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time L2 04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time L8 02 Overheat Pre Alarm Level L8 06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level Capacity Related Parameters 5 Notes Capacity Related Parameters B 6 Appendix Specifications This appendix details the standard Drive Specifications Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications 2 PUGNA E 2 o Tp D m 3 FAN RY 2 0 lt gt 4 Specifications C 1 Standard Drive Bypass Specifications The standard Drive and Bypass specifications are listed in the following tables 208 VAC Table C 1 208 VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 VAC 50
322. ut Relays 1 2 and 3 may be re programmed via DIP switches S2 and S3 on the Bypass Control PCB A2 These relays provide form C dry contacts for customer use in annunciation to Building Automation Systems or general duty in other control logic circuits Each contact is rated for 5 amps at 120 VAC The additional programmable output relay functions are described in the table below Table 2 5 Programmable Output Relay Functions Function Beseipton Factory Defot Bypass Run Annunciates running in Bypass mode Intended to close a contact in a damper actuator circuit Damper Actuator whenever the motor is commanded to run operation similar to the dedicated Motor Run relay Annunciates automatic transfer to Bypass operation due to a Drive fault Drive Run Annunciates running in Drive mode Annunciates that the run command is coming from serial communications Annunciates that the Drive or Bypass is being operated in Hand local mode Annunciates that the Drive or Bypass is being operated in Auto remote mode Annunciates that a Drive motor overload or control circuit fault has occurred Auto Transfer Serial Com Run Hand Mode Auto Mode System Fault Electrical Installation 2 9 See Table 2 6 for DIP switch positions required to achieve these functions Table 2 6 DIP Switch Settings for Output Relay Functions Programmable Programmab
323. ve E7N Bypass unit The b5 X X parameters are defaulted to a good starting point for most HVAC applications Final adjustment to some of the b5 X X parameters for the project at hand may be required Hand mode run stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND OFF AUTO selector Options None Bypass with PI Control and no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 4 20 mA applied to Terminal TB3 3 Drive terminal 2 Auto mode run stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 Significant Parameter Setting Drive Operational Result b1 01 0 Operator Speed command Hand and PI setpoint Auto source Keypad Operator U1 01 b5 01 1 Enable Enable PI mode of operation H1 03 19 PI Disable A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode This input contact is closed when H O A Hand H3 08 2 4 20 mA default Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4 20 mA Note Control PCB DIP switch S1 2 must also be ON H3 09 B PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control Options None Bypass with PI Control and no options Hand mode speed command from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad Operator Auto mode PI Feedback input signal 0 10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3 3 Drive terminal A2 Auto mode ru
324. ve Fault Bypass Run Motor O L Safety Open Damper BAS Interlock Smoke Purge Auto Transfer and Auto Run The membrane over the Drive keypad is non removable on these Bypass units In order to use the keypad copy function on a Bypass unit order a separate keypad part number CDR001115 The Keypad Control Operator has a digital alpha numeric display and keypad in the upper portion for Drive operation and programming The row of LEDs above the alpha numeric display indicate Drive operational status The row of LEDs below the alpha numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active The lower portion of the Keypad Control Operator displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND OFF AUTO functions for both the Drive and Bypass via a touchpad The general rule for LED colors in the lower portion of the control panel 15 Green Normal Status Amber Abnormal Status Red Fault Status Physical Installation 1 9 B Input Disconnect Switch Electrically located on the input power side of the Bypass unit the disconnect provides a through the door padlockable operator mechanism The Bypass three phase input power connection is made to the input terminals of the disconnect The door mounted rotary operating mechanism 15 a convenient means of disconnecting the Bypass unit from line power for equipment maintenance The disconnect must be in the OFF position in order to open the enclosure door The rotary handle can
325. werback The pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor charge contactor does not Drive was running finch hanically NEUON MEL AANGAAN Y Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Some features within the PI function group cause the Drive to shut down momentarily e g Sleep Function WARNING Snooze Function Feedback Loss feature etc Upon recovery from the conditions that activate these features the Drive may start unexpectedly Therefore when enabling these features take appropriate measures to notify personnel working with this equipment that unexpected starting may occur Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 12 Alarm Detection Alarms are Drive protection functions that does not operate the fault contact The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed During an alarm condition the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 02 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate corrective action according to the table below Table 6 4 Alarm Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display BUS Option Com Err CALL SI F G ComCall EF External Fault EFO Opt External Flashing EF3 Ext Fault 53 Flashing EF4 Ext Fault S4 Flashing EF5 Ext Fault S5 Flashing EF6 Ext Fault S6 Flashing EF7 Ext Fault S7 Flashing DNE Drive not Enabl
326. wire control 1 User Initialization 1110 The modified Drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings User settings are stored when parameter 2 03 1 Set Defaults 2 2 Wire Initialization 2220 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward Run and Reverse Run respectively 3 3 Wire Initialization 3330 The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 S2 and S5 configured as Run Stop and Forward Reverse respectively After an initialization is performed parameter A1 03 will automatically be set back to 0 Stop Operation switch switch FWD Run Stop NC contact contact Run command run on momentary close mU Stop command stop on momentary open Forward reverse command multi function input Sequence input common 2 wire control 3 wire control d 4 P Fig 5 1 2 amp 3 Wire Control Wiring Examples See Virtual Terminals note on page 5 2 Some parameters are unaffected by either the 2 Wire or 3 Wire initialization The following parameters will IMPORTANT not be reset when parameter A1 03 2220 or 3330 A 1 00 Language Selection 1 03 V f Pattern Selection 02 04 kVA Selection 02 09 Initialization Specification Selection Programming 5 11 B A1 04 Password Entry Setting Range 0109999 Factory Default 0 If parameters A1 01 through A1 03 an
327. wire initialization should be carried out by entering 2220 2 Wire Initial in parameter A1 03 followed by entering the 1110 User Initialize function also in parameter A1 03 This will re establish the E7 Drive set up required for the E7N Bypass application and any user parameter values that have been stored otart Up and Operation 4 6 5 6 T 9 10 Table 1 is also used to document parameters that have been factory set to typical values for fan and pump applications These parameters b1 07 b1 08 b8 01 L4 05 L5 01 L5 03 01 02 02 03 and 03 02 may be changed to meet the needs of the specific application From the ADV PRGM menu press DATA ENTER go to parameter E1 01 and enter the nominal input voltage that the Drive will receive in this specific application The overall voltage classification of the Drive cannot be changed by this parameter However the input voltage should be adjusted within the range available for the given voltage class of the Drive to match the input voltage level normally found on the jobsite For example 480 VAC class Drives may be employed on nominal three phase voltage distribution systems of 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC The factory default values may need to be changed to meet the needs of the application distribution voltage From parameter E1 01 use the ESC and DATA ENTER keys as necessary to go to parameter E2 01 and enter the Motor Rated Current Set this par
328. work communication via one of 3 embedded protocols Specifying option J will enable the Metasys N2 protocol and will provide the necessary parameter settings and wiring jumpers to be network ready when delivered Project specific 5 parameters are setup by the user Option L Serial Communication Echelon LonWorks An isolated RS 422 485 circuit board provides LonTalk protocol for network communication to a BAS This option plugs into the CN2 connection on the Drive control circuit board Option N Input Capacitive Network Radio Frequency Interference Filter Electronic equipment can be sensitive to low levels of voltage distortion and electrical noise This passive wye delta capacitive filter is intended for installation on the VFD input in order to protect other sensitive electronic loads it provides attenuation of conducted RFI and EMI Option P Pressure to Electrical Transducer This transducer is employed when converting a pneumatic signal to an electrical signal for use as the Drive speed command input The need for this option comes up on retrofit applications when the pneumatic signal that formerly controlled the pneumatic actuator on Inlet Guide Vanes IGV for example is now to be used to control the fan speed via the Drive This option is wired to terminals TB5 7 TB5 8 and TB5 9 parameters H3 10 and H3 11 are used for final field calibration of this input if there is jobsite variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneuma
329. y and selecting AUTO operation In the AUTO mode the Bypass will look for a run command contact closure at terminals TB1 2 and TB1 9 on PCB A2 to control the run stop status of across the line full speed motor operation Operating with DRIVE TEST selected Bypass mode The only valid use of the DRIVE TEST function is in Bypass mode DRIVE TEST provides for local control of the Drive for programming or other tests while keeping it isolated from the motor that is operating in Bypass mode DIP Switch Selectable Functions The switch selectable functions Auto Transfer Safety Circuit Interlock and BAS Interlock represent control strategies that may need to be disabled under various application circumstances They may be enabled in any combination from none of them to all of them See Table 4 1 for a summary of some common combinations of these switch selectable inputs B Auto Transfer to Bypass When enabled DIP switch S2 1 the Bypass unit will automatically switch into Bypass mode on a Drive fault After clearing the Drive fault condition the function resets by moving the disconnect switch to the OFF position and waiting for the keypad to go blank CAUTION Before selecting this function in fan applications care must be taken to ensure that the ductwork is designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at minimum position or closed The factory default for this function is disabl
330. y be set as low as 10 of the Drive output current rating The ampere value in E2 01 however must always be greater than the No Load Current value in parameter E2 03 or an 2 error will be displayed Programming 5 47 B E2 03 No Load Current Setting Range Model Dependent see appendix B Factory Default Model Dependent Set E2 03 to the motor no load current at rated voltage and rated frequency Consult the motor manufacturer for the proper value if the no load current is not stated on the motor nameplate F6 Com OPT Setup Applies only to the LonWorks option B F6 01 Operation Selection After Communication Error Sens Alarm Only factory default If a serial communication option board is attached to the Drive at the 2CN connector the Drive will automatically monitor the card for any type of communication errors F6 01 is applicable no matter whether a run command or speed command is coming via the option board digital operator or terminal input The setting of F6 01 determines whether the communication error is seen as a fault or an alarm If F6 01 3 Alarm Only then the fault output is not energized upon a communication error other settings of F6 01 cause the fault output to energize The setting of F6 01 does not apply to any of the embedded communication protocols used at the RS 485 422 terminals on the removable terminal board See parameters H5 0X F6 02 Option PCB External Fault Detectio

E7N Drive/Bypass Technical Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents